JP2017113474A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing reduction of a game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine which performs a game using game media comprises: a performance display part on which a prescribed performance display is performed; light guide decoration means which is provided on a front side of the performance display part, and expresses a prescribed light guide decoration on a front surface side by light entrance to a prescribed light entrance part; and performance control means for controlling a performance which contains the performance display and the light guide decoration. The light guide decoration means comprises a special light guide decoration pattern in which, the light guide decoration expressed on the front surface side is changed continuously, by change of the light entrance part. The performance control means has means for executing a dynamic light guide performance in which, the light entrance part is changed and the light guide decoration is continuously changed in performing a specific display on the performance display part when a prescribed condition is established.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 194

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to receive a gaming medium in which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the gaming area, and a gaming medium in the gaming area. And a plurality of entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, bonus winning opening), V winning opening, etc.) When accepted, a predetermined number of game media are paid out and the player can be entertained. In the center of the game board, an effect display means comprising a liquid crystal display device or the like capable of displaying an effect image is provided, and an effect corresponding to the game state that changes as a game medium is driven into the game area. By displaying the image, it is possible to entertain the player even with the effect image.

  Further, in recent years, in order to diversify the effects of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a light-emitting effect in which a predetermined light guide decoration is displayed on the light guide plate arranged in front of the effect display means (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200611

  However, the effect using the conventional light guide plate is a simple effect in which the same light guide decoration (decorations such as pictures, characters, patterns, etc.) continues to be displayed for a predetermined time. The appeal of giving surprises and surprises to a person is weak, and as a result, there is a risk of deteriorating amusement.

  Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above-described object, the present invention provides a gaming machine that performs a game using a game medium.
An effect display unit for performing a predetermined effect display;
A light guide decoration means that is provided in front of the effect display unit and that displays a predetermined light guide decoration on the front surface side by light incident on a predetermined light incident part;
Production control means for performing control related to the production including the production display and the light guide decoration,
The light guide decoration means is formed with a special light guide decoration pattern in which the light guide decoration exposed on the front side is continuously changed by the change of the light incident part,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect control means executes a dynamic light guide effect that continuously changes the light guide decoration by changing the light incident part while performing a specific display on the effect display unit. It has the means to do.

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a) It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a dispensing device, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path by the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel an opaque state. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel the transparent state. FIG. 115 is a front view of the gaming unit in the state shown in FIG. 114, in which the front unit is cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the gaming area. It is a front view which expands and shows the site | part of the arrow A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit in a back unit into the back front front unit, the back front middle unit, and the back front-back unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit in a back unit into the back front front unit, the back front middle unit, and the back front-back unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the site | part of the upper left corner of a game board, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line | wire in (a). It is a perspective view shown in the state which abbreviate | omitted the center accessory with respect to the arrow B in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the unit before back of the back decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front back middle unit of the back front decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the front front middle unit of the back front decoration unit in the up-down direction, and was seen from the top, (b) is description which expands and shows the left end vicinity of sectional drawing of (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the vicinity of the right end of sectional drawing of (a). (A) is a front view which shows the decoration of the 1st light guide plate of the unit before back, (b) is a front view which shows the decoration of the 2nd light guide plate of the unit before back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower movable production | generation unit into the back lower raising / lowering unit and the back lower decoration body unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is a back lower raising / lowering production unit and It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the back lower decoration body unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower raising / lowering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower raising / lowering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower decorative body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower decorative body unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit of the back lower decorative body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit of the back lower decorative body unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) looks at the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left decoration body unit of the back left movable production | presentation unit and the back right decoration body unit of the back right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left decoration body unit of the back left movable production | presentation unit and the back right decoration body unit of the back right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | reproduction unit in the back of a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the movable production unit in the back of a back unit from the back. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approach position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the raised position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the separated position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the raised position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approach position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are in the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are in the second appearance position. The back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach position in the state where the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position, and the back of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit are in the second appearance position. The back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable rendering unit in the raised position, and the back of the back left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made the left decoration body unit and the back right decoration body unit the 3rd appearance position. A front view of a game board showing a back center left decorative body unit, a back center right decorative body unit, and a back center central decorative body unit in a state between a retracted position and an appearance position of the back middle movable effect unit. is there. It is a front view of the game board showing the back center left decorative body unit, the back center right decorative body unit, and the back center central decorative body unit in the back middle movable effect unit in the state where they appear. The back middle left decorative body unit, back middle right decorative body unit, and back middle central decorative body unit of the back middle movable production unit are set as the appearance positions, and the sub decorative portion of the back middle central decorative body is the back middle left decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state matched with the decoration. The back middle left decorative body unit, back middle right decorative body unit, and back middle central decorative body unit of the back middle movable production unit are set as the appearance positions, and the sub decorative portion of the back middle central decorative body is the back middle left decorative body. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made it match | combine with this decoration, and made the back middle left side decoration body unit and the back middle right side decoration body unit into the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first light guide plate of the front middle unit is decorated with light emission. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the second light guide plate of the front middle unit is decorated with light emission. The back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit is set to the lowered position, and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit are set to the close position, and the sub effect display device, the back bottom left decorative body, and the back bottom right It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where light decoration was carried out in the small V shape using the decoration object. The back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit is set to the ascending position, and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit are set to the close position, the sub effect display device, the back bottom left decorative body, and the back bottom right It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the decorative body is light-decorated in a heart shape with the same color. The back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit is set to the ascending position, and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit are set to the close position, the sub effect display device, the back bottom left decorative body, and the back bottom right It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where light decoration was carried out in the small V shape using the decoration object. The back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach position in the state where the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position, and the back of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. The left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit are set as the second appearance positions, and the front front upper left decorative body and the back front upper right decorative body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, and the back lower right of the back front decorative unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which carried out the light emission decoration in the large V shape using the ornament, the back left ornament, and the back right ornament. The back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable rendering unit in the raised position, and the back of the back left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit. The left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit are set to the third appearance position, and a medium-sized V using the sub-effect display device, the back bottom left decorative body, the back bottom right decorative body, the back left decorative body, and the back right decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made the light emission decoration in the shape of a letter. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd receiving port opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. The first light guide plate of Modification 1 is decorated with light emission, and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach positions while the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position. In the state where the front decoration unit is illuminated in a large V-shape using the back front upper left decoration body and the back front upper right decoration body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view which shows the decoration of the 1st light-guide plate of the modification 1. The first light guide plate of Modification 1 is decorated with light emission, and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are set to the approach positions while the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position. In the state where the front decoration unit is illuminated in a large V-shape using the back front upper left decoration body and the back front upper right decoration body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown. It is the simplified sectional view which cut | disconnected the center role object of the modification 2 at the approximate center of the left-right direction, and was seen from the side. The pachinko machine shown in a state in which the light guide plate of the modified example 2 is decorated with light emission, and the left intermediate decoration body, right intermediate decoration body, left unit decoration cover, and right unit cover are light-decorated in an ultra-large V shape. FIG. It is a front view which shows the decoration of the light-guide plate of the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an animation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an animation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an animation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an animation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an animation effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 as viewed from the front, and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as an operator's finger when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It includes a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feeding unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is the upper and lower sides from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and passes through the entrance 251a and the ball exit 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball transport unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the ball launching device 680, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feeding port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253a that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and divides between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball removing member 253 and the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 and extend vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feed member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around an axis, and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. The part opened to the rear on the end side is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hitting ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved back and forth by a ball feeding operation rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and a movement of the tip of the ball feeding operation rod 256 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b, A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feeding unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 256 that is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operation rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 to thereby move the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state located. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  Further, the ball removing member 253 pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the actuating rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the ball removal member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball is taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 by operating a string, the illegal game ball launched (hit) by the ball launcher 680 is illegal. After a string attached to a simple game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 attached rotatably to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 that is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and a front view of the upper dish ball removal button 327. A ball rental button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball rental button 328, and a ball rental button 328 The ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 約 bulges forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store game balls, and is attached to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a that vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a and can discharge the game balls, and the tray unit cover 326. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendered production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end side of the front end side that extends short to the left and right, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in the front view. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half wraps around the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340). Area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area in which the game ball can be stored (the area corresponding to the storage area in plan view and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the dotted hatch area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326 j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It arrange | positions at the lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back of the side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In a state in which is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately inserted into the region on the left side of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps up, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 It is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Accordingly, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can do. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separated, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Moreover, although the cover standing wall part 340a of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example which stood up from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325, the bottom wall part 325a of the lower dish main body 325 showed the bottom plate cover 340's The cover standing wall 340a may rise. Moreover, although the ceiling part 340b of the lower tray cover 340 showed the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown in the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape without a through-hole, but a plurality of through holes through which game balls cannot pass are shown. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance that passes through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, a production image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the production operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2 and the production operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped upward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. Moreover, the return part 322e is good also as what does not comprise the side wall of the lower plate 322, and may comprise a part of side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rear side of the covering wall on the front end side of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit mounting part 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In addition, the area | region shown with a dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 has shown the remaining space of the attachment space 326j.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, compared to the main body unit 325A. Projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension part 325B is formed with an escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIGS. 47B and 47C, the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than that of the example of FIG. The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) includes a main body 325A that forms part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2 and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a, It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. In addition, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C in the lower plate body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. Further, since the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes behind (in the installation space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball punching hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. You may make it provide the lower dish ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. A flat closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper tray ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guide path 323f An opening through which the operation transmitting portion 327a that is penetrating back and forth at a height between the two and contacting the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 faces rearward. Includes a 323g, the. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (on the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. Yes.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. In addition, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. The upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the front lower dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole penetrating in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the site of the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). In addition, the dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover part 326k comes into contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 comes into contact with the right end. Yes.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side of the upper side of the top plate part 326h is shifted to the left and right by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball removal lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball removal button 327 comes into contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. An upper pan ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are for the player in the main effect display device 1600 arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, or the like. When an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time.

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is accommodated in a stepped portion that is recessed from below to above at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward while the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation buttons 410 are attached so as to be able to advance and retreat.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Each of the three press detection sensors 440 that are attached to the 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, the upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion. It has. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating through the front plate portion 432b is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the production operation unit 400. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 and the door frame base unit 100 for relaying the connection to the door body relay board. Is.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431 a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from peripheral control board 1510 in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who presses the operation button 410 can be prevented. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and an effect of the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed and display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, In addition, the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear opened. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front end of these operation button springs comes into contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, whereby the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed backward in a U shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Yes. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed to the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. A curved screen-like general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape with a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape with the shaft center of the upper shaft member 473 as the center in the assembled state in the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b in the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  In addition, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member that diffuses light between the sub-screen decoration 477 and the LED 477a. The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image on which the effect image is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape and noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in the back center. The operation button 410 is pressed to the player by the lighting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to promote.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Thereby, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position and the second position where the sub screen 472 is in the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is struck from the upper side. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second rendering operation unit 400 </ b> A has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The second presentation operation unit 400 </ b> A has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second performance operation unit 400 </ b> A is attached to the dish unit 320 between the lower end of the leg piece part 512 b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate part 326 i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In addition, a gap is formed. That is, the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible as the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second performance operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second performance operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is applied to the player who presses the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), compared with a flat plate shape. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 This member can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like that are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the state of the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) made of a triangle arranged on the front side and the decoration made of a quadrangle arranged on the rear side (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) overlap each other so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. As the position moves, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the three-dimensional decoration with a depth can be displayed to the player. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, it is possible to make the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable can be displayed.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction to change from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. If the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect that the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is obtained. The player can be shown and entertained.

  In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the player can show a decoration with movement and a three-dimensional feeling to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the first LED 422a, 423a emits light to decorate the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 86A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape with a square tube shape that is short in the front-rear direction and closed in the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, as shown in FIG. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape in side view as in the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By making the member 561 and the like illuminate in a unique manner, the attendant of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and recognized, and the problem can be quickly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 574 has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and is disposed on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574 The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 574 are penetrated. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward in a front view. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right sides, and about a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion projecting forward. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending leftward and rightward at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely from the portion protruding in a trapezoidal shape forward in the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut from the rear end in the left-right direction on the lower surface to the front. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front side of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is connected to the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that the opened portion is closed by the unit main body 574. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side to the left of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. Thereby, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 are formed on the right side. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion port 605 that passes through the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and a door of the board unit 900 that passes through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and the lower side. A connecting opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board placement part 602 when viewed from the front, and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. A speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attaching portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivotable to a position slightly lower on the left side from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 whose rear part is bent in an L shape upward, and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend from the left end to the upper side and extend upward from the left end. A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a columnar shape from the bottom of the unit base 701 to the front, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and back by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c. The Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the player's interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust or dirt does not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and that has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  The three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 with the dispensing device 830 assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout vane 839 comes into contact with the outer peripheries of the front vane 839b and the rear vane 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d in a crank shape. Cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the dispensing vane 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, and from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 respectively, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a. A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion into left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front, and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. When the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and is fully filled. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 273, the full tank reception port 274, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3 is provided. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, thereby operating the door frame 3. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e, and from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls through the foul cover unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storage of the game ball in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in the gaming state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to make the player devoted to the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 122. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in which the panel of the game panel is in an opaque state. 115 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the gaming board from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board in which the panel of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 119 is a front view in which the front unit is cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area in the game board in the state of FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the portion indicated by arrow A in FIG. Further, FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails K that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 120).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are game regions. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that a game ball can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball; and a game ball A second start port 2004 (see FIG. 119) that allows game balls to be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003, and a first start port 2002 or a second start port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached from the top right to the left of the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a general start port 2001 and a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002. And a side unit 2200 that is attached to the inner rail 1002 along the inner rail 1002 on the left side when viewed from the front when viewed from the front, and a lower right corner when viewed from the front within the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit 2100 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to a position slightly above the center of the game area 5a. It is equipped with a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. On the rear surface of the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear box 3010a on the rear side below the opening 3010a. The effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the panel relay board 3031, the motor drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the effect drive board 3032 in the rear view of the back box 3010, and the rear face of the back box 3010 And an upper relay substrate 3034 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in a flat frame-like back front decoration unit 3100, and the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 and below the opening 3010a. A back bottom movable effect unit 3200 and a back left movable effect unit 3300 and a back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the rear side of the front front decoration unit 3100 and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010; In the back box 3010, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is mounted between the back front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable effect unit 3300, and the back right movable effect unit 3400 so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. And.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002, although not shown. These positioning protrusions can be inserted into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and the notch 1127 pass through the lower full tank. The front guide openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the ball path unit 860 face forward.

  A function display unit 1400 is attached to the front component member 1000 in the lower left corner when viewed from the front outside the game area 5a.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 and has a minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail K is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. ). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes composed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion, penetrating in the front-rear direction and vertically extending. And a long hole extending. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions are cut out to substantially half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the long holes. Is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion. And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It becomes the same plane. In addition, the holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface having a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and forward from the front of the holding step portion. It has a plurality of projecting pins that extend toward and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other by fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step at a position corresponding to the engaging step of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engaging claw is disposed on the upper part of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step portion, It is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engaging step portion. The engaging claw has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece is on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. A predetermined amount is extended. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component member 1000. The panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 by inserting the attachment bosses of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of attachment holes, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) that controls game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the general winning opening through the panel relay board 3031. A sensor 3166, a first start port sensor 3167, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003, and a lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002 And a first 140 lottery that displays the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is “big hit” or the like, a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 and 122. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 166) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a sub effect display device 3240, an effect drive substrate 3032, and a motor drive substrate. 3033, etc.

[5-7. Main effect display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The main effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Specifically, the main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. Then, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 121 and 122. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning ports 2001 and a plurality of general winning ports. 2001 is a first start port 2002 that is always open so that a game ball can be received at a different position in the game area 5a, and a gate portion that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball. 2003, a second start port 2004 (see FIG. 119 and FIG. 120) that allows game balls to be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when game balls pass through the gate part 2003, and a first start A special winning opening 2005 that allows a game ball to be received according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004. There.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction is disposed below the lower end of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction is the stage of the center accessory 2500. It is arranged above the lower end of 2530. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.

  The gate portion 2003 is located at the upper right in the front view with respect to the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, and is disposed below the center in the up-down direction in the vicinity of the right end in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is arranged at the same height as the general winning port 2001 right below the center in the left-right direction just below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is attached from the position directly above the out port 1126 to the left in the front view at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002. The unit 2100, the side unit 2200 which is attached to the inner rail 1002 along the inner rail 1002 on the left side when viewed from the front of the start port unit 2100, and the right side when viewed from the front of the start port unit 2100 And an attacker unit 2400 having one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and a frame mounted substantially in the center of the game area 5a. Center-shaped accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 and the like. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed so as to extend to the left in front view from directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starter unit 2100 is provided with a first starter port 2002 at the uppermost center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and a plurality of general left-hand sides slightly below the first starter port 2002 in the front view. One of the winning openings 2001 is provided. The general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting unit 2100 are always open upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a transparent unit main body 2101 in which a first start port 2002 is formed and attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. This start-up unit 2100 passes through the transparent unit main body 2101 and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the back and front lower middle decoration body 3168 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side is played by the player. It can be visually recognized from the side (front).

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are opened upward. The starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guiding portion 2531 in the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 described later. Accordingly, when a game ball is released downward from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, it is received at the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The starter unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the first starter port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and receives it in the first starter outlet outlet 3162 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. Can pass.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 and the like. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end of the front view adjacent to the start port unit 2100, and has two general winning ports 2001 that are always open toward the upper left of the front view and the right of the front view, respectively. . Further, the side unit 2200 has a transparent flat plate-like unit main body 2201 attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, protrudes forward in the vicinity of the left end of the main body 2201 in front view, and lowers the right end side in front view. And a shelf 2202 extending left and right. The side unit 2200 is formed such that two general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the unit main body 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the two general winning ports 2001 are located below the first start port 2002 and at a position between the start port unit 2100 and the shelf 2202. It becomes a state of projecting forward from the front surface of 1110. When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the leftmost shelf 2202 is positioned above the two general winning ports 2001, the general winning port 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing.

  The side unit 2200 passes the transparent unit main body 2201 and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the back side left lower decoration body 3118 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side ( It can be visually recognized from the front).

  Further, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2202. . The game ball guided to the shelf 2202 may be received in the two general winning ports 2001, the general winning port of the starting port unit 2100, and the first starting port 2002. The side unit 2200 guides the game balls received in the respective general winning ports 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers them to the general winning port left discharge port 3163 of the front decorative unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. Can do.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 of the four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second start port 2004, and a big winning port 2005.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate portion 2003 through which game balls circulate (pass) vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and a second start port 2004 that opens forward directly under the gate portion 2003. Has been placed. The second start port 2004 is separated from the gate portion 2003 by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The general winning port 2001 and the second starting port 2004 are separated by a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with one general winning port 2001 that is always open upward to the left of the second starting port 2004, and opens forward below the general winning port 2001. The horizontally long winning prize opening 2005 is arranged. The big winning opening 2005 is separated from the general winning opening 2001 (second start opening 2004) by a distance 4 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The general winning port 2001 and the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are formed to have a size that can receive only one game ball. The gate portion 2003 is formed in such a size that only one game ball can pass therethrough. The big winning opening 2005 is formed in a size that opens in the left-right direction at a length about five times the outer diameter of the game ball. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged such that the center in the left-right direction is located slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the general winning opening 2001 arranged above.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 (see FIG. 165) that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004, a large And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball received in the winning opening 2005.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start port door 2411 that can be moved forward and backward so as to protrude forward from the lower side of the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2411 through the game ball of the gate portion 2003. A starter solenoid 2412 that protrudes forward according to the lottery result, and a rectangular plate shape that extends from side to side that can close the prize winning port 2005 from the front, with the lower side extending around the axis extending in the left-right direction. Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 An attacker solenoid 2414 for rotating the grand prize opening door 2413.

  When the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (not energized), the second start port door 2411 moves (retracts) rearward, and the front end (front end) is located behind the front of the game panel 1100. In the state (normal state), even if the game ball passes through the front of the second starting port 2004 that is always open forward, the second starting port 2004 is not accepted. It will pass through the front of. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (energized), the second start port door 2411 moves forward (moves forward) and protrudes into the game area 5a. If the game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004 while the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the second start port door 2411, and the second start port door 2411 It will be guided rearward and will be received in the second starting port 2004. As described above, the second start port 2004 can receive the game ball or cannot receive the game ball by moving the second start port door 2411 back and forth by the start port solenoid 2412.

  The special prize opening door 2413 is in an upright state when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (not energized), and closes the special prize opening 2005 that opens forward. In this state (normal state), even if a game ball passes in front of the big prize opening 2005, it will not be accepted into the big prize opening 2005, and will pass through the front of the big prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (energized), the special prize opening door 2413 rotates so that the upper side moves forward around the lower side, and the upper side is positioned slightly above the lower side. Stop in state. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the big prize opening 2005, the game ball comes into contact with the surface facing the upper side of the big prize opening door 2413 and is guided backward by the big prize opening door 2413. The winning opening 2005 will be accepted. In this way, the special winning opening 2005 can be received or cannot be received by turning the special winning opening door 2413 by the attacker solenoid 2414.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically along the left side of the second start port 2004 and protrudes forward from the second start port left wall portion 2421 and the upper end of the second start port left wall portion 2421. A second starting port shelf 2422 that extends to the left and protrudes to the left shorter than the outer diameter of the first and second portions that extend up and down along the right side of the second starting port 2004 and that protrudes forward. The second starting port right wall portion 2423 and the second starting port right wall portion 2423 are separated from the second starting port 2004 from the height near the lower end of the gate portion 2003 by being slightly away from the outer diameter of the game ball to the left. And a right passage wall portion 2424 that extends up and down to a lower height and protrudes forward. The second start port shelf 2422 is inclined so that the right end side (second start port 2004 side) is slightly lower.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 is disposed between the lower end of the right passage wall portion 2424 and the big winning opening 2005, and has a block member 2430 that protrudes forward (in the game area 5a) and affects the flow of the game ball. I have. The block member 2430 extends from the vicinity of the lower end of the right passage wall portion 2424 to the vicinity of the lower portion of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end side is lowered to the left and the attacker shelf 2431 protruding forward, and the attacker shelf An attacker left vertical wall portion 2432 that extends downward from the left end of 2431 to the vicinity of the upper side of the big prize opening 2005 and protrudes forward, and extends to the right from the lower end of the left vertical wall portion 2432 of the attacker and the right edge of the big prize opening 2005. An attacker lower wall portion 2433 projecting forward and extending right and left so as to connect the right end of the attacker lower wall portion 2433 and the right end of the attacker shelf portion 2431 and projecting forward. 2434.

  The lower left end of the attacker shelf 2431 protrudes slightly leftward from the left end of the upper general winning opening 2001, and is longer than twice the outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the big winning opening 2005. It is located to the right by the distance L (see FIG. 120). In other words, the left-right position of the left end of the attacker shelf 2431 is slightly larger than half of the outer diameter of the game ball from the center in the left-right direction of the big winning opening 2005 to the right. Also, the left end of the attacker shelf 2431 is located at a height of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball from the upper side (upper end) of the big prize opening 2005 upward.

  When the attacker left standing wall portion 2432 extends downward from the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2431, the attacker left standing wall portion 2432 extends from the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2431 obliquely to the lower right and then extends vertically downward. That is, the attacker left standing wall 2432 is bent so that the vicinity of the upper end extends obliquely to the upper left. The left side wall 2432 of the attacker has a vertically extending position in the left-right direction slightly to the left with respect to the center of the left-right direction of the big prize opening 2005 (in other words, from the left end of the big prize opening 2005 to the right Is located at a distance of about 2.5 times the outer diameter.

  The attacker lower wall portion 2433 extends horizontally along the upper side of the big prize opening 2005, and the right end is located at a distance of about twice the outer shape of the game medium from the right end of the big prize opening 2005 to the right. . The attacker lower wall portion 2433 covers a part of the upper part of the special winning opening 2005.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the gaming panel 1100, and the gate portion 2003 is positioned below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 described later, and the general prize is awarded. The mouth 2001, the gate part 2003, and the second start opening 2004 are located above the lower end of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of obstacle nails K are also planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement around the attacker unit 2400 in the game area 5a.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the general winning port 2001, the gate unit 2003, and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are assembled from the lower end of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5. Therefore, even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530, it is not received by the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 or passed through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to be received at the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 or to pass through the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to distribute the right side of the center accessory 2500.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails K are planted between the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 and the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. A plurality of paths are formed on the side. Accordingly, the game balls released from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability. The passage of the game ball at the gate part 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401, the main control board 1310 performs lottery of the normal lottery result.

  The game balls that have passed through the gate part 2003 flow down on the attacker shelf 2431 of the block member 2430 through the front of the second starting port 2004 arranged immediately below. A gap having a distance of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004. Therefore, even when the game ball released from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 passes through the left side or the right side of the gate part 2003 without passing through the gate part 2003, the gate part 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided. There is a possibility of circulating in front of the second starting port 2004 through a gap between the two.

  More specifically, when the game ball circulates on the left side of the gate part 2003, when the game ball flows down onto the second start opening shelf part 2422 by the plurality of obstacle nails K implanted in the left side area of the gate part 2003, It is guided to the right by the inclination of the two start opening racks 2422 and is sent to the front of the second start opening 2004 with a high probability. On the other hand, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the gate part 2003, when the game ball flows down near the upper end of the right passage wall part 2424, the upper part of the right passage wall part 2424 is inclined so as to become lower toward the second starting port 2004. From the second starting port 2004 through the upper side of the gap (second starting port right wall 2423) between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004. There is. Note that the game balls that have circulated between the second start port 2004 (second start port right wall portion 2423) and the right passage wall portion 2424 flow down onto the attacker shelf 2431 of the block member 2430.

  When the game ball circulates in front of the second start port 2004, if the second start port door 2411 moves forward and protrudes into the game area 5a, the front of the second start port 2004 is The game ball that has flowed down comes into contact with the upper surface of the second starter door 2411 and is guided to the rear second starter 2004 side, and is received by the second starter 2004. The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is transferred to the second start port outlet 3165 of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then the lower board. It is discharged onto the holder 1200.

  The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401). Sometimes, when the start-up solenoid 2412 is turned ON, it is moved so as to protrude forward. When the second start port 2411 moves forward, the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. That is, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed by the advancement and retreat of the second start port door 2411.

  The opening and closing timing of the second start port 2004 for the lottery of the normal lottery result in the gate part 2003 can be set as appropriate. For example, a game ball that has passed the gate part 2003 and has drawn “normal hit” It can be made to be received in the starting port 2004.

  The game balls that have circulated on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and have not flowed down onto the second start port shelf 2422 are arranged to the left of the second start port 2004 by a plurality of obstacle nails K. There is a possibility that it will be received in the general winning opening 2001 that is guided in the direction of and is always open upward. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are delivered to the general winning opening right outlet 3164 of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. After being detected by the mouth sensor 3166, it is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  There is a possibility that the game ball that has circulated on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 arranged on the downstream side or the open large winning opening 2005. is there. Further, the game balls that have circulated on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, that is, between the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004, flow down onto the attacker shelf 2431 of the block member 2430.

  The game ball that has flowed onto the attacker shelf 2431 of the block member 2430 is guided to the left as viewed from the front by the inclination of the attacker shelf 2431, and is released downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2431. Since the big prize opening 2005 is arranged below the left end side of the attacker shelf 2431, when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball is on the left side of the attacker shelf 2431, that is, the block member 2430. If it flows down near the left side, it is accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  As shown in the drawing, the winning prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 is covered with a block member 2430 above the right half. The right end side (attacker right standing wall 2434) of the block member 2430 is close to the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and is formed so that game balls do not circulate on the right side of the block member 2430. Accordingly, the game balls that are released downward from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 and are not received by the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 are formed to circulate on the left side of the block member 2430. Yes.

  The block member 2430 covering the upper right half or more of the top winning opening 2005 has an outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the winning winning opening 2005 to the right in the left-right direction (the left standing wall portion 2432 of the attacker). It is arrange | positioned so that it may be located in the distance L of about 2.5 times. As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of obstacle nails K are planted in the left region of the block member 2430, and a plurality of paths leading to the front of the winning prize opening 2005 are formed on the left side of the block member 2430. Has been. Accordingly, the game balls that have circulated on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 and the attacker shelf 2431 in the attacker unit 2400 pass through one of a plurality of paths formed by the plurality of obstacle nails K, and the front of the big winning opening 2005. Will circulate towards.

  When a game ball circulates in front of the big prize opening 2005, if the big prize opening door 2413 rotates and the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down in front of the big prize opening 2005 Then, it comes into contact with the surface facing the top of the special prize opening door 2413 and is guided to the rear special prize opening 2005 side and is received in the special prize opening 2005. In this example, when a game ball is released from the left end of the attacker shelf 2431 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, it is accepted into the special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403. The big prize opening sensor 2403 is arranged on the left side of the block member 2430 in the big prize opening 2005, that is, in the part where the upper part is not covered by the block member 2430, and is thus guided backward by the big prize opening door 2413. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005, it is immediately detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403. Then, the game ball detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  According to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that the game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the attacker solenoid 2414 is turned ON. As a result, the upper prize side 2005 is opened so that the upper side moves about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward and the game ball can be received. The opening / closing timing and the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 are appropriately set according to the lottery result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery result.

  The game balls that have not been received in the grand prize winning hole 2005 flow down onto the lower right rail 1004, pass through the out port 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5 a, and are discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The

  Thus, according to the attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the distance L in the left-right direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer shape of the game ball between the left end of the big prize opening 2005 and the left end of the block member 2430. Since there are a plurality of paths (flow paths) to the big prize opening 2005 as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, it is planted in the area above the big prize opening 2005. Regardless of the state of the plurality of obstacle nails K, the game ball can be accepted into the open prize opening 2005 with an extremely high probability, and the player can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the reception of the game ball into the big prize opening 2005 is located on the left outside of the block member 2430, that is, between the left end of the big prize opening 2005 and the left end of the block member 2430 (game). Therefore, the game ball received in the special prize opening 2005 can be immediately detected by the special prize opening sensor 2403. Accordingly, when the winning prize opening 2005 is closed (opening and closing) by accepting a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming state where the winning prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (for example, “big hit game”). When a predetermined number of game balls are received in the big prize opening 2005, the game balls can be immediately detected and the big prize opening door 2413 can be closed, so that an extra game ball is placed in the big prize opening 2005. Acceptance can be reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

[5-8d. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 121 and 122. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 at a position slightly above the center of the front view. Installed on the front. The center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely transparent and formed in a frame shape, and includes a main effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame, various effect units provided in the back unit 3000, and the like. Visible from the front.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. An open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of releasing the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a are provided (see FIG. 119, etc.). .

  The entire stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is recessed downward, the center in the left-right direction slightly bulges upward, and the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction are lowest. It is formed in such a wave shape. The stage 2530 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the front at the center guiding portion 2531 that is inclined downward toward the front at the center in the left-right direction, and at the lowest portion on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction. A pair of side guide portions 2532. The stage 2530 can discharge the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 through the warp inlet 2520 into the game area 5a from either the central guide part 2531 or the pair of side guide parts 2532.

  In the center combination 2500, the center guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 in a state where the center combination 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Thus, when the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes into the right guide passage 2540 and the right guide passage 2540 that discharges the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front to the left after being slightly guided to the left. A plurality of ridges 2541. The right guide passage 2540 forms a passage (flow path) having a width that allows only one game ball to flow between the right guide passage 2540 and the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 when assembled in the game board 5. The right guide passage 2540 extends from the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 to the position slightly below the center in the vertical direction along the right rail 1005, and the downstream end is located immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2400. ing. In addition, the plurality of protrusions 2541 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game balls when the game balls flowing in the right guide passage 2540 come into contact with each other.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main constituent members, and FIG. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. On the rear surface of the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear box 3010a on the rear side below the opening 3010a. The effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the panel relay board 3031, the motor drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the effect drive board 3032 in the rear view of the back box 3010, and the rear face of the back box 3010 And an upper relay substrate 3034 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a.

  The panel relay board 3031 is composed of a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3166, a first starting opening sensor 3167, and a starting opening solenoid. Relays 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) are relayed. The effect drive board 3032 and the motor drive board 3033 are based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back bottom movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, In addition, a decorative board, a drive motor, and the like provided in the middle movable effect unit 3500 are controlled. The upper relay board 3034 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3032 and the motor drive board 3033 and the back and middle movable effect unit 3500.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is a panel relay board attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the panel relay board 3031, the effect drive board 3032, the motor drive board 3033, and the upper relay board 3034. A cover 3035, an effect drive board cover 3036, a motor drive board cover 3037, and an upper relay board cover 3038 are provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in a flat frame-like back front decoration unit 3100, and the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 and below the opening 3010a. A back bottom movable effect unit 3200 and a back left movable effect unit 3300 and a back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the rear side of the front front decoration unit 3100 and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010; In the back box 3010, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is mounted between the back front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable effect unit 3300, and the back right movable effect unit 3400 so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. And.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and is spaced from the periphery of the opening 3010a in a direction along the surface of the game panel 1100. And a liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b having a flat frame shape projecting rearward, and a left fixed piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is inserted into the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the right side when viewed from the back. Two fixed grooves 3010c, a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b, and the front end of the back box 3010 The flange-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the opening 3030a and the lower side of the opening portion 3010a are open upward. And a guide groove 3010f is provided with a.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of main effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the fixed piece portion 3010e of the back box 3010 is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

  Further, the guide groove 3010f of the back box 3010 has a guide piece 3353c of the decoration base 3353 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 and a back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit 3400 from above. The guide piece 3453c of the decorative body base 3453 at 3450 is inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The guide groove 3010f regulates the movement of the guide piece 3353c and the guide piece 3453c in the front-rear direction.

[5-9b. Front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 133. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit, which is disassembled into a front front unit, a back front middle unit, and a back front and rear unit, and FIG. 127 shows the back front decorative unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the front front unit, the back front middle unit, and the back front-back unit, and was seen from back. FIG. 128 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the upper left corner of the game board, and FIG. 128 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. FIG. 129 is a perspective view showing a state where the center accessory is omitted with respect to the arrow B in FIG. 128. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front front middle unit of the back front decoration unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front decoration unit as viewed from the rear, after the rear front middle unit is disassembled. is there. FIG. 132 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the front-side middle unit of the back-side decorative unit cut in the vertical direction and viewed from above, and (b) is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the left end of the cross-sectional view of (a). It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the right end vicinity of sectional drawing of (a). FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing decoration of the first light guide plate of the front middle unit, and FIG. 133 (b) is a front view showing decoration of the second light guide plate of the front middle unit.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a flat frame shape with a thin depth in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The front front decoration unit 3100 is arranged so as to close the inner front of the front front unit 3110 from the rear side and the front front unit 3110 formed in a substantially C shape with the lower part opened in front view. The flat front middle unit 3130 and the front front middle unit 3130 and the front front front unit 3110 are supported from the rear side, and are attached near the front end of the back box 3010 and opened upward in plan view. And a back front / rear unit 3160 formed in a letter shape.

  The front front unit 3110 in the back front decoration unit 3100 includes a flat front upper base 3111 that is attached to the front end above the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction, and a back front upper base 3111. The front front upper left decorative body 3112 and the front front upper right decorative body 3113, which are respectively attached near the left and right ends of the front surface, and the front front upper part between the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 The back front upper middle decorative body 3114 attached to the front surface of the base 3111, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body 3114 extend left and right. A back logo decoration body 3115 on which a logo (not shown) in accordance with the concept of the cage pachinko machine 1 is formed.

  Further, the front front unit 3110 has a front left side decorative body 3116 and a front front right side decorative body 3117 which have upper ends attached to the left and right ends of the front upper base 3111 and extend vertically. The front left lower decorative body 3118 and the back front right lower decorative body 3119 are provided near the lower ends of the left side decorative body 3116 and the back front right side decorative body 3117, respectively.

  Further, the front front unit 3110 is disposed between the back front upper base 3111, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body 3114. A front front decorative board 3120 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a front right decorative board 3121 that is attached to the rear side of the front right side decorative body 3117 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

  The front front upper left decorative body 3112 of the front front unit 3110 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape and has one continuous decoration. The back front upper left decorative body 3112 includes a middle decorative portion 3112a extending obliquely from the upper left to the lower right, and a peripheral decorative portion 3112b surrounding the left and right sides and the upper side of the middle decorative portion 3112a. The middle decorative portion 3112a is formed in a glass slide shape in which a surface of a colorless and transparent member is subjected to a textured process. The peripheral decorative portion 3112b is formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member. This back front upper left decorative body 3112 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back left decorative body 3354 in the back left movable effect unit 3300 described later.

  The back front upper left decorative body 3112 is assembled to the game board 5 and, in a front view, the decorative rear portion 3112c located on the rear side of the panel board 1110 outside the opening 1112 in the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. And a decorative front portion 3112d located inside the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500). As shown in FIGS. 128A and 129, the front surface of the decorative front portion 3112 d of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, the decorative front portion 3112d of the front upper left decorative body 3112 swells (projects) into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 from the rear. As a result, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the decoration front part 3112d of the back front upper decorative body 3112 swells forward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the depth feeling of the front left upper decorative body 3112 can be emphasized, and the decorativeness in the game area 5a can be further enhanced. Further, the back front upper left decorative body 3112 is formed into a three-dimensional decoration that can be recognized as one by the decoration rear part 3112c and the decoration front part 3112d.

  The front right upper decorative body 3113 of the front front unit 3110 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape and has one continuous decoration. The back front upper right decorative body 3113 includes an inner decorative portion 3113a extending obliquely from the upper right to the lower left, and a peripheral decorative portion 3113b surrounding the left and right sides and the upper side of the intermediate decorative portion 3113a. The middle decorative portion 3113a is formed in a glass slide shape in which a surface of a colorless and transparent member is subjected to a graining process. The peripheral decorative portion 3113b is formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member. This back front upper right decorative body 3113 is formed so as to be continuous with a back right decorative body 3454 in a back right movable effect unit 3400 described later.

  The front front upper right decorative body 3113 is assembled to the game board 5 and, in a front view, the decoration rear part 3113c located on the rear side of the panel board 1110 outside the opening 1112 in the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. And a decorative front part 3113d located inside the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500). The front surface of the decorative front portion 3113d of the upper front right decorative body 3113 projects forward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, the decoration front part 3113d of the back front upper right decorative body 3113 bulges (projects) into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 from the rear. As a result, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the decorative front part 3113d of the front upper right decorative body 3113 bulges forward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the depth feeling of the front right upper decorative body 3113 can be emphasized, and the decorativeness in the game area 5a can be further enhanced. Further, the back front upper right decorative body 3113 is formed into a three-dimensional decoration that can be recognized as one by the decoration rear part 3113c and the decoration front part 3113d.

  As shown in the drawing, the back upper middle decorative body 3114 has a decoration simulating a globe at the center, and is partially translucent. The back logo decoration body 3115 is not shown in detail, but a logo having translucency is formed on the front surface, which is made of a predetermined character string according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The front logo decoration body 3115 has a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface of the portion excluding the front logo.

  The back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and the back front logo decorative body 3115 are assembled on the game board 5, and are displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. The upper part in the game area 5a is decorated.

  The front left side decorative body 3116 includes a translucent part and a metallic luster part, and a linear radial decoration centering on the center of the game area 5a is formed. The front right side decorative body 3117 includes a portion having translucency and a portion having a metallic luster, and a linear radial decoration centering on the center of the game area 5a is formed. The front left side decorative body 3116 and the back front right side decorative body 3117 are located on the left and right outer sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and are located on the left side in the game area 5a. Each part and the right part are decorated.

  The front left lower decorative body 3118 includes a part having translucency and a part having metallic luster, and a mechanical decoration based on a straight line is formed. The back right lower decorative body 3119 includes a translucent part and a metallic luster part, and a mechanical decoration based on a straight line is formed. The back left lower decorative body 3118 and the back front right lower decorative body 3119 are arranged on the lower side of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the lower part in the game area 5a is arranged. It is decorated.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back front upper decorative board 3120. The back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and the back front logo decorative body 3115 are provided. , Each can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the back front upper decorative substrate 3120 includes a back front upper left decorative body 3112 with a middle decorative portion 3112a and a peripheral decorative portion 3112b, and a back front upper right decorative body 3113 with a central decorative portion 3113a and a peripheral decorative portion 3113b, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission. The front right decorative board 3121 can decorate the front right side decorative body 3117 with light emission.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the front front middle unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is spaced apart from the left and right, and is attached to the back front and rear unit 3160 and extends vertically. 3132, a left cover 3133 and a right cover 3134 attached to the front surfaces of the left base 3131 and the right base 3132, and a transparent disposed between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132, respectively. A flat first light guide plate 3135, and a transparent flat second light guide plate disposed between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 on the rear side of the first light guide plate 3135. 3136.

  The left base 3131 has a shape in a front view that extends vertically downward from the upper end by a distance of about 3/4 of the total height, then extends horizontally to a short side, and then extends vertically downward to the lower end. It is formed in a crank shape. The right base 3132 has a shape in a front view extending vertically downward from the upper end by a distance of about 3/4 of the total height, and then extending horizontally shortly to the left and obliquely extending to the lower left to the lower end. It is formed into a shape. The left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 are formed in substantially the same shape as the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 in the front view.

  The first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 extend to the left and right so as to connect (close) the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the left and right sides are respectively left. The base 3131 and the right base 3132 are formed in a shape along the shape. The first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are formed in the same shape in plan view, and a plurality of through holes for attachment to the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 are formed in the vicinity of both the left and right sides. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the first light guide plate 3135 is formed with a first pattern 3135a drawn by a plurality of minute irregularities in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from the top. ing. The first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is a pattern having a predetermined character string (here, “HERE COMES A NEW CHALLENGER”). As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the second light guide plate 3136 is formed with a second pattern 3136a drawn by a plurality of minute irregularities. The second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is a flame (or lightning) pattern extending radially from the center.

  The first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is visible by being decorated with light emitted from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, which will be described later. It becomes. The second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 includes a second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, an LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, a second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the back. It becomes visible by being decorated with light emission by the light from the LED 3144a of the front middle lower right decorative board 3144.

  Further, the front front middle unit 3130 is disposed between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 at a portion between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132. A translucent and strip-like upper left spacer 3137, a lower left spacer 3138, an upper right spacer 3139, and a lower right spacer 3140 are provided. These upper left spacer 3137, lower left spacer 3138, upper right spacer 3139, and lower right spacer 3140 form a gap between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

  The upper left spacer 3137 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end on the left side of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 and a portion extending horizontally. The lower left spacer 3138 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending vertically upward from the lower ends of the left sides of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The upper right spacer 3139 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end on the right side of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 and a portion extending horizontally. The lower right spacer 3140 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending obliquely upward from the lower ends of the right sides of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

  The upper left spacer 3137, the lower left spacer 3138, the upper right spacer 3139, and the lower right spacer 3140 have a part of the width in the left-right direction (specifically, about 1/6 of the total width), and the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The remaining portion protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

  The front middle unit 3130 includes a first LED 3141a and a second LED 3141b that can irradiate light toward the side surfaces extending vertically downward from the upper ends of the left side surfaces of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136, respectively. A plurality of front and rear middle left decorative boards 3141 and a front and rear surfaces on which a plurality of LEDs 3142a capable of irradiating light toward the side surface extending vertically upward from the lower end of the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136 are mounted. A plurality of first LEDs 3143a and a plurality of second LEDs 3143b each capable of irradiating light toward the side surfaces extending vertically downward from the upper ends of the right side surfaces of the first and second light guide plates 3135 and 3136 are mounted. The right and left front decorative boards 3143 and the right side of the second light guide plate 3136 are obliquely extended upward from the lower ends. LED3144a capable of irradiating light toward the are provided with a plurality implemented during the previous back and bottom right decorative substrate 3144, the.

  The back front middle left decorative board 3141 has a plurality of first LEDs 3141a arranged vertically in the vicinity of the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 3141b are arranged vertically at positions spaced rearward from the rows of the plurality of first LEDs 3141a. Are lined up. The back front middle left lower decorative board 3142 has a plurality of LEDs 3142a arranged in the vertical direction. In the front middle right decorative board 3143, a plurality of first LEDs 3143a are arranged vertically in the vicinity of the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 3143b are arranged vertically at positions spaced rearward from the rows of the plurality of first LEDs 3143a. Are lined up. The back front middle right lower decorative board 3144 has a plurality of LEDs 3144a arranged in the vertical direction.

  The front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the front middle lower left decorative substrate 3142 are attached so as to be sandwiched between the left base 3131 and the left cover 3133. The front front middle right decorative substrate 3143 and the front front middle right lower decorative substrate 3144 are attached so as to be sandwiched between the right base 3132 and the right cover 3134. 1st LED 3141a and 2nd LED 3141b of back front middle left decoration board 3141, LED 3142a of back front middle left lower decoration board 3142, 1st LED 3143a and second LED 3143b of back front middle right decoration board 3143, and back front middle right lower decoration The LEDs 3144a of the substrate 3144 are full color LEDs, respectively.

  Further, the front middle unit 3130 is a transparent strip plate that guides the light from the first LED 3141a of the front front middle left decorative substrate 3141 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end of the left side surface of the first light guide plate 3135. A transparent strip plate that guides light from the first lens left 3145 and the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end of the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. A transparent belt-plate-like second lens that guides light from the LED 3142a of the second lens left 3146 and the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142 to the side surface extending vertically upward from the lower end of the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. Light from the lower left 3147 and the first LED 3143a of the front right middle decorative board 3143 is guided to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end of the right side surface of the first light guide plate 3135. A transparent strip-shaped first lens right 3148 and transparent light that guides light from the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end of the right side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. A transparent strip that guides the light from the LED 3144a of the second right lens plate 3149 in the form of a belt plate and the front / rear middle right lower decorative substrate 3144 to the side surface extending obliquely upward from the lower end of the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. A second right lower lens 3150.

  The first lens left 3145, the second lens left 3146, the second lens lower left 3147, the first lens right 3148, the second lens right 3149, and the second lens lower right 3150 are the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The surface facing the side surface is formed in a wave shape, and light incident from the opposite surface can be diffused and emitted to the side surfaces of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

  In the assembled state, the front front middle unit 3130 has the left end of the upper left spacer 3137 projecting outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 so that the first front left middle decorative substrate 3141 has the first end. It is located near the right side surface between the LED 3141a and the second LED 3141b. In addition, a portion of the upper left spacer 3137 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is sandwiched between the first lens left 3145 and the second lens left 3146. Yes. Thereby, the light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 is irradiated only to the left side surface of the first lens left 3145, and the second lens left 3146 side is irradiated by being blocked by the upper left spacer 3137. There is nothing. In addition, the light from the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 is irradiated only to the left side surface of the second lens left 3146, and the first lens left 3145 side is irradiated by being blocked by the upper left spacer 3137. There is no. That is, the light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 irradiates only the first light guide plate 3135 through the first lens left 3145, and the light from the second LED 3141b passes through the second lens left 3146. In this way, only the second light guide plate 3136 is irradiated.

  In the front front middle unit 3130, the left end of the lower left spacer 3138 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is the front of the LED 3142 a of the front front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142. Located near the right side. In addition, the lower left spacer 3138 has a second lens lower left 3147 in contact with a rear surface of a portion protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. As a result, the light from the LED 3142a of the front lower middle decorative substrate 3142 is irradiated only to the left side surface of the second lens lower left 3147, and the front side (first light guide plate 3135 side) is blocked by the lower left spacer 3138. It will never be done. Accordingly, the light from the LED 3142a of the front left middle lower decorative substrate 3142 is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 through the second lens lower left 3147.

  Further, the right front end of the upper right spacer 3139 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is connected to the first LED 3143a and the first LED 3143a in the front front middle right decorative substrate 3143. It is located near the left side surface between the two LEDs 3143b. Further, the portion of the upper right spacer 3139 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is sandwiched between the first lens right 3148 and the second lens right 3149. Yes. Thereby, the light from the first LED 3143a of the front right middle decorative board 3143 is irradiated only to the right side surface of the first lens right 3148, and the second lens right 3149 side is blocked by the upper right spacer 3139 and irradiated. There is nothing. Further, the light from the second LED 3143b of the front right middle decorative board 3143 is irradiated only to the right side surface of the second lens right 3149, and the first lens right 3148 side is blocked by the upper right spacer 3139 and irradiated. There is no. That is, the light from the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 irradiates only the first light guide plate 3135 through the first lens right 3148, and the light from the second LED 3143b passes through the second lens right 3149. In this way, only the second light guide plate 3136 is irradiated.

  Further, the front middle unit 3130 has a right end (an end facing the lower right) of the lower right spacer 3140 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. It is located in the vicinity of the left side surface (the surface facing the upper left) which is the front of the LED 3144a of the middle right lower decorative board 3144. Further, the second lens lower right 3150 is in contact with the rear surface of a portion of the lower right spacer 3140 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. As a result, the light from the LED 3144a of the front lower middle right decorative board 3144 is irradiated only on the right side surface of the second lens lower right 3150, and the front lower side (first light guide plate 3135 side) is blocked by the lower right spacer 3140. Will not be irradiated. Therefore, the light from the LED 3144a of the back front middle lower right decorative substrate 3144 is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 through the second lens lower right 3150.

  When the first front LED 3141a of the front front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the front front middle right decorative substrate 3143 emit light, the front middle unit 3130 emits light on the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135. (See FIG. 133 (a) and FIG. 159). Further, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the LED 3144a of the back front middle right lower decorative board 3144 are caused to emit light. Then, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 can be decorated with light emission (see FIGS. 133 (b) and 160).

  As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the back front and rear unit 3160 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward, and is attached near the front end of the back box 3010. A plate-like unit base 3161 and a first starting port that is attached to the lower center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3161 and receives a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and discharges it downward. A general winning opening which is disposed on the left side of the front opening of the discharge opening 3162 and the first start opening 3162 and receives the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them downward. The left outlet 3163 and the first start outlet 3162 are arranged to the right of the front view, and the general winning port 20 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged. The first winning opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening right discharge opening 3164 and the general winning opening right discharge opening 3164 that receives the gaming balls received in 1 and discharges them downward. And a second start port discharge port 3165 for receiving and discharging the game ball received in the lower portion.

  The back front / rear unit 3160 is attached to the unit base 3161 and detects the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and passed to the general winning opening left outlet 3163 and the general winning opening right outlet 3164, respectively. A general winning port sensor 3166, a first starting port sensor 3167 that detects a game ball received by the first starting port 2002 and passed to the first starting port outlet 3162, and a vicinity of the first starting port outlet 3162. And a magnetic sensor (not shown). A magnetic sensor (not shown) is for monitoring an illegal act using a magnet.

  Further, the back front / rear unit 3160 is attached to the lower center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3161, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 having the first start port outlet 3162 opened at the top, The back and front left decorative body 3169 attached along the left side of the front surface, the back and front right decorative body 3170 attached along the right side of the front surface of the unit base 3161, and the unit base 3161 and the front front bottom Between the decoration body 3168 and the back front / rear left decoration body 3169 and between the front bottom left bottom decoration board 3171 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, between the unit base 3161 and the back front bottom middle decoration body 3168 And a front lower right decorative board 3172 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The back front lower middle decorative body 3168 of the back front / rear unit 3160 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape. The back front lower middle decorative body 3168 includes a middle decorative portion 3168a that covers the lower side and the left and right sides of the first start port discharge port 3162 so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the lower end toward the upper end. And a peripheral decorative portion 3168b disposed on the left and right outer sides of the portion 3168a. The middle decorative portion 3168a is formed in a glass slide shape in which a surface of a colorless and transparent member is subjected to a graining process. The peripheral decorative portion 3168b is formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member. The back front / rear left decorative body 3169 and the back front / rear right decorative body 3170 are formed in a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a flame by a member having translucency.

  The back front left bottom decorative board 3171 illuminates and decorates the left half of the back front bottom middle decorative body 3168, the bottom of the back front / rear left decorative body 3169, and the back front left bottom decorative body 3118 of the back front front unit 3110. it can. The back front lower right decorative board 3172 can illuminate and decorate the right half of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 and the back front right lower decorative body 3119 of the back front front unit 3110. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front left lower decorative board 3171 and the back front right lower decorative board 3172 are full-color LEDs.

  In the assembled state, the back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in a frame shape whose outer periphery is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a back front upper left decorative body 3112, a back front upper right decorative body 3113, a back front upper middle decorative body 3114, a back front left side decorative body 3116, a back front right side decorative body 3117, and a back front left lower decorative body 3117. The decorative body 3118, the back front right lower decorative body 3119, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back front / rear left decorative body 3169, and the back front / rear right decorative body 3170 are displayed in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. The frame is formed in a frame shape with a large circumference, and the transparent first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are closed in the frame.

  Further, the back front decoration unit 3100 includes a front decoration 3112d of the back front upper left decoration body 3112, a front decoration 3113d of the back front upper right decoration body 3113, a part of the back front upper middle decoration body 3114, and a front logo decoration. The body 3115 and part of the back front / rear right decorative body 3170 are located inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the front view, and pass through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (player) From the front side (player side) through the transparent panel board 1110.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a first LED 3141a and a second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, an LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, a first LED 3143a and a second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and When the LED 3144a of the back front middle right lower decorative board 3144 is not emitting light, the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 are viewed from the front (player side). It is not possible to visually recognize the rear through the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 causes the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the front front middle right decorative board 3143 to emit light, so that the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is appropriately displayed. Light emission can be decorated with colors (see FIG. 159). In the state in which the first pattern 3135a is decorated with light emission, as shown in FIG. 159, a pattern composed of a predetermined character string is displayed in front of the main effect display device 1600.

  Further, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the second LED 3143b of the front front middle right decorative board 3143, and the LED 3144a of the front front middle right lower decorative board 3144 are emitted. By doing so, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 can be appropriately decorated with light emission (see FIG. 160). In the state where the second pattern 3136a is light-decorated, as shown in FIG. 160, the center of the game area 5a is centered on a wide range from the front of the main effect display device 1600 to the back of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. The displayed radial pattern is displayed.

  Further, although not shown in the figure, the front front decoration unit 3100 is configured such that when the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 are illuminated and decorated in the same color at the same time, In the pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a, the portion overlapping in the front and back emits light brighter than the other portions. Further, if the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 are light-decorated with different colors at the same time, the first pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a overlap in the front-rear direction. The portion that emits light emits a color based on additive mixing of the three primary colors of light.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the back front decoration unit 3100 has a first pattern 3135a formed (depicted) even though the first pattern 3135a is smaller than the second pattern 3136a. Since the light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 on which the second pattern 3136a is formed (depicted) have the same size, the first light guide plate 3135 is matched to the size of the first pattern 3135a In comparison, it is possible to prevent the edge of the first light guide plate 3135 from being seen and deteriorate in appearance when viewed from the front, and the appearance of the first pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a can be improved.

  Further, since the front decoration unit 3100 has different sizes of the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136, the patterns having different sizes are displayed. As a result, the player can be surprised and the player can be more entertained by enhancing the effect.

[5-9c. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back bottom movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 134 to 141. FIG. 134 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 135 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower back movable production unit broken down into a lower back lifting unit and a back lower decorative unit, and FIG. 135 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back lower movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the unit and the back lower decoration body unit, and was seen from back. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back lifting unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower lifting unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit of the back bottom decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 141 is a back bottom left decorative body of the back bottom decorative body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the unit and the back lower right decoration body unit, and was seen from back.

  The under-back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The under back movable effect unit 3200 includes a back under lift unit 3210 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a pair of cylindrical members attached to the front surface of the back under lift unit 3210 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The lift shaft 3201, the shaft attachment member 3202 that attaches the upper end side of the pair of lift shafts 3201 to the back and bottom lift unit 3210, and the pair of lift shafts 3201 are attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a lower back decorative body unit 3230 that is moved up and down by the unit 3210. The back lower decorative body unit 3230 includes a sub effect display device 3240 that can display a predetermined effect image, a pair of back lower left decorative body units 3250 that are rotatably attached to the front side of the sub effect display device 3240, and the back And a lower right decorative body unit 3260.

  As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137 and the like, the lower back raising / lowering unit 3210 of the lower back movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and extends to the left and right. And a pair of back and bottom elevating drive motors 3212 attached to the lower left and right ends of the front surface of the unit base 3211 and a pair of spur gears attached to the rotating shafts of the pair of back and bottom elevating drive motors 3212, respectively. The elevating drive gear 3213, each elevating drive gear 3213 meshes with each other, and a pair of spur gear-shaped transmission gears 3214 that are rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211, and each transmission gear 3214. Gear portion 3215a meshing with each other, and a cylindrical lifting pin protruding forward from the front surface of the gear portion 3215a 215b and a pair of annular elevating cam members 3215 that are rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211, and are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211 through the respective elevating cam members 3215. And a pair of disk-like rotation support members 3216 to which the elevating cam member 3215 is rotatably attached in cooperation with the cage unit base 3211.

  In addition, the lower back lifting unit 3210 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front side of the unit base 3211 on the front side of the pair of lifting cam members 3215 in the left-right direction. A pair of belt-like lift arms 3217 whose side extends from the lift cam member 3215 to the center side in the left-right direction and rotates so that the tip side moves up and down by the rotation of the lift cam member 3215, and the unit base 3211 A pair of elevating detection sensors 3218 that are attached to the front surface and detect the rotational position of each elevating arm 3217, and each elevating arm 3217 is urged to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. A pair of lifting support springs 3219 and a lower back relay board 3220 attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3211. , And a.

  The unit base 3211 of the lower back raising / lowering unit 3210 is formed in the vicinity of the lower end on the front side so as to be separated from the left and right, and a pair of lower shaft mounting portions 3211a for attaching the lower end of the lifting shaft 3201 and a pair of lower shaft mounting portions 3211a. And a pair of upper shaft mounting portions 3211b which are formed at the upper end of the unit base 3211 and are attached to the upper end of the elevating shaft 3201. The unit base 3211 has a lower back drive motor 3212, a transmission gear 3214, a lift cam member 3215, a rotation support member 3216, a lift arm 3217, and a lift detection sensor 3218 on both outer sides in the left and right direction from the portion where the pair of lift shafts 3201 are attached. , And a lifting support spring 3219 is attached. Further, the unit base 3211 has a back relay board 3220 attached between the parts to which the pair of lifting shafts 3201 are attached.

  The raising / lowering cam member 3215 is attached to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward at a position slightly above the center of the unit base 3211 in the vertical direction. The elevating arm 3217 is pivotally mounted on the base end side at a position substantially the same height as the rotation center of the elevating cam member 3215, and the distal end extends to the vicinity of the elevating shaft 3201.

  The elevating arm 3217 penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the longitudinal direction. The elevating arm 3217 has an elongated drive slit 3217a into which the elevating pin 3215b of the elevating cam member 3215 is slidably inserted, and the distal end side of the drive slit 3217a. An elongate elevating slit 3217b that penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction to the vicinity of the tip, and a detection piece 3217c that extends downward from the lower side in the vicinity between the drive slit 3217a and the elevating slit 3217b. And. An action pin 3231c of an elevating base 3231 of a back lower decorative body unit 3230 described later is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3217b of the elevating arm 3217. Further, the detection piece 3217c of the lifting arm 3217 is detected by the lifting detection sensor 3218.

  The back bottom relay board 3220 includes a back bottom up / down drive motor 3212, a lift detection sensor 3218, a back bottom middle decoration board 3233 of the back bottom decoration body unit 3230, a back bottom rotation drive motor 3234, a sub effect display device 3240, a back bottom left The connection of the decoration board 3254, the back lower right decoration board 3264, the effect drive board 3032, and the motor drive board 3033 is relayed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, FIG. 139, etc., the lower back decorative body unit 3230 of the lower back movable effect unit 3200 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the shape of the front view is slightly horizontally long and the front is opened. A lift base 3231 guided by the lift shaft 3201, a sub effect display device 3240 arranged in the lift base 3231 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a frame shape decorating the outer periphery of the sub effect display device 3240 The back and bottom decorative frame 3232 having translucency and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating the back and bottom decorative frame 3232 are mounted on the front surface and attached to the back of the sub effect display device 3240 in the lifting base 3231. And a lower back middle decorative substrate 3233.

  The lower back decorative body unit 3230 is also provided with a lower back rotation drive motor 3234 attached so that the rotation shaft protrudes forward on the left side of the front surface near the lower end of the rear surface of the lifting base 3231, and the lower back rotation drive. A rotation drive gear 3235 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3234, and a rotation drive gear 3235 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the lower left end of the lift base 3231 from the center in the left-right direction. The back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 that can be attached to each other and can rotate about an axis that extends back and forth in the vicinity of the lower right side of the lifting base 3231 from the center in the horizontal direction. The back bottom right decorative body unit 3260, the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250, and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are attached. It includes a pair of pivot support spring 3236 that support the dynamic, the.

  The elevating base 3231 has a projecting portion 3231a projecting outward in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the lower ends of the left and right ends, and a through hole 3231b penetrating the projecting portion 3231a up and down and into which the elevating shaft 3201 is slidably inserted. The protrusion 3231a protrudes rearward from the rear surface in a columnar shape and is inserted slidably into the lift slit 3217b of the pair of lift arms 3217 in the lower back lift unit 3210, and below the protrusion 3231a. A pair of shaft hole portions 3231d that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction near the center in the left-right direction and penetrate the front and rear, and rotatably support the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260; It has.

  The pair of shaft hole portions 3231d in the elevating base 3231 are formed at symmetrical positions with the center in the left-right direction of the elevating base 3231 as the center, and the shaft portion of the left base member 3251 in the back lower left decorative body unit 3250, respectively. 3251b and the shaft portion 3261b of the right base member 3261 in the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are rotatably inserted.

  The pair of rotation support springs 3236 includes a back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and a back lower right decorative body unit 3260 that are rotatably attached to the pair of shaft hole portions 3231d of the elevating base 3231. It is biased to rotate in the approaching direction.

  The back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 of the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 includes a left base member 3251 that is rotatably attached to the lifting base 3231 and a base end on the front surface of the left base member 3251 as shown in FIGS. 140 and 141. A flat left base 3252 that is attached to the left side and extends toward the left side, and an underside that is attached to the front side of the left base 3252 and that a predetermined decoration is formed in a relief shape having translucency. A left decorative body 3253, and a back lower left decorative substrate 3254, which is disposed between the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the left base 3252 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, are provided.

  The left base member 3251 of the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 extends backward from the rear surface of the disk-shaped main body 3251a and the main body 3251a, and is rotatable to a shaft hole portion 3231d on the left side of the lifting base 3231 in front view. A cylindrical shaft portion 3251b to be attached, a drive gear portion 3251c formed on the outer periphery of the main body portion 3251a and meshable with the rotational drive gear 3235 of the lower back decorative body unit 3230, and a drive gear on the outer periphery of the main body portion 3251a. A transmission gear portion 3251d formed on the opposite side of the portion 3251c. The drive gear portion 3251c and the transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251 are formed in an angle range of about 90 degrees on the circumference around the shaft portion 3251b.

  The left base 3252 is attached to the front surface of the main body 3251a of the left base member 3251 at the rear surface of the base end side. The left base 3252 is formed in a substantially J-shape with a front view extending leftward from the base end side and then extending upward in an arc shape.

  The back lower left decorative body 3253 is formed in a shape that is larger than the outer shape of the left base 3252 and is along the left base 3252. The back lower left decorative body 3253 extends from the base end side to the front end side, and includes a sliding glass-like middle decorative portion 3253a having a surface of a colorless and transparent member, and a lower side and an upper side of the middle decorative portion 3253a. And a peripheral decorative portion 3253b formed in a shape simulating a flame by a red transparent member on the distal end side.

  The back lower left decorative substrate 3254 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the middle decorative portion 3253a and the peripheral decorative portion 3253b of the lower back left decorative body 3253 can be individually decorated with light emission.

  The back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 of the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 is, as shown in FIGS. A flat right base 3262 that is attached to the right side and extends toward the right side, and a lower back that is attached to the front side of the right base 3262 and has a predetermined decoration in the form of a light-transmitting relief. A right decorative body 3263, and a back lower right decorative board 3264, which is disposed between the back lower right decorative body 3263 and the right base 3262 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, are provided.

  The right base member 3261 of the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 extends rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped main body 3261a and the main body 3261a, and is rotatable to the shaft hole 3231d on the right side of the elevation base 3231 in front view. A cylindrical shaft portion 3261b to be attached, and a driven gear portion 3261c which is formed on the right outer periphery of the main body portion 3261a and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251 in the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250. I have. The driven gear portion 3261c of the right base member 3261 is formed in an angle range of about 90 degrees on the circumference around the shaft portion 3261d.

  The right base 3262 is attached to the front surface of the main body 3261a of the right base member 3261 at the rear surface on the base end side. The right base 3262 is formed in a substantially J shape whose front view extends rightward from the base end side and then extends upward in an arc shape.

  The back lower right decorative body 3263 is formed in a shape that is larger than the outer shape of the right base 3262 and along the right base 3262. The back lower right decorative body 3263 extends from the proximal end side to the distal end side, and includes a sliding glass-like middle decorative portion 3263a in which a surface of a colorless and transparent member has been subjected to graining, and a lower side and an upper side of the middle decorative portion 3263a. And a peripheral decorative portion 3263b formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member on the distal end side.

  The back lower right decorative substrate 3264 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the inner decorative portion 3263a and the peripheral decorative portion 3263b of the lower back right decorative body 3263 can be individually decorated with light emission.

  The back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are formed symmetrically with each other in front view.

  Next, the operation of the back bottom movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the back bottom movable effect unit 3200 has the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 lowered most, and the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 have their tips aligned with each other. It is farthest away, and the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 is visible from the front. More specifically, in a normal state, the pair of protrusions 3231a of the lifting base 3231 in the back lower decorative unit 3230 abuts on the pair of shaft lower mounting portions 3211a of the unit base 3211 in the back lower lifting unit 3210 from above. It is in the state (state of the lowered position).

  In a normal state, the lifting pins 3215b of the pair of lifting cam members 3215 in the lower back lifting unit 3210 are located near the bottom dead center, and the lifting arms 3217 are slidably inserted. In the drive slit 3217a, it is located in the vicinity of the end on the base end side (the side on which the lifting arm 3217 is rotatably attached). As a result, the pair of lifting arms 3217 in the lower back lifting unit 3210 extends obliquely so that the distal end is positioned below the base end that is rotatably supported. In this normal state, the detection pieces 3217c of the pair of lift arms 3217 are detected by the lift detection sensor 3218.

  Further, in a normal state, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 that are rotatably attached to the pair of shaft hole portions 3231d of the elevating base 3231 are respectively located from the positions of the shaft hole portions 3231d. The front side of the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 is outside the front of the sub effect display device 3240. At the position, each is curved in an arc shape so as to extend upward. Thereby, the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 is exposed forward.

  In this normal state, when the rotation drive gear 3235 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back rotation drive motor 3234 of the back lower decorative body unit 3230, the rotation drive gear 3235 is engaged with the rotation drive gear 3235. The drive gear portion 3251c of the left base member 3251 in the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 causes the left base member 3251 to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portion 3251b. The entire 3250 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portion 3251b. When the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the driven gear portion of the right base member 3261 in the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251. 3261c causes the right base member 3261 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portion 3261b, and the entire back lower right decorative body unit 3260 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft portion 3261b. It will turn to.

  Therefore, in the normal state, when the rotation drive gear 3235 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back lower rotation drive motor 3234, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. At the same time, the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. That is, the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are rotated so that the front ends thereof move upward, and the front ends thereof come close to each other. And if the front-end | tip of back bottom left decoration body unit 3250 and back bottom right decoration body unit 3260 contact | abut (or approach as much as possible), the rotational drive of back bottom rotation drive motor 3234 will stop.

  In the state in which the tips of the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are in contact with each other (in the approach position state), the left part and the right part of the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 are the back side. The lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are covered, and only the central portion of the sub effect display device 3240 is between the lower back left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260. The state is visible from the front (see FIG. 148 and the like). In the state where the tips of the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are in contact with each other (in the approach position), the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are formed. The outer shape of one decoration is a substantially heart shape.

  With the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 in the close position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 are used. Each of the 3263s is illuminated with red light and a red image (heart complement decoration image) is displayed on the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240, so that the heart-shaped light-emitting decoration can be shown to the player. (See FIG. 162).

  On the other hand, the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 emit the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the lower back right decorative body 3263 in a predetermined color (for example, white). A small V-shaped light-emitting decoration is displayed by displaying an effect image (V-complementary decoration image) that is continuous with them in the same color as the medium decoration part 3253a and the medium decoration part 3263a on the sub effect display device 3240. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 163).

  In the normal state, the lower back movable effect unit 3200 moves the left lift cam member 3215 counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 3214 by the pair of lower lift drive motors 3212 in the lower lift unit 3210. When the right elevating cam member 3215 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the elevating pin 3215b of each elevating cam member 3215 revolves in the direction in which each elevates. . When each lift pin 3215b revolves, the lift pin 3215b slides in the drive slit 3217a of the lift arm 3217 slidably inserted toward the tip side and above the revolved lift pin 3215b. The drive slit 3217a is pushed upward by the movement to.

  The left and right lifting arms 3217 are rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the lifting cam members 3215 in the left-right direction, so that the left and right lifting arms 3217 are lifted by the revolution of the lifting pins 3215b of the left and right lifting cam members 3215. The arm 3217 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the right lifting arm 3217 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the tip side of each lifting arm 3217 moves upward. And since the action pin 3231c of the raising / lowering base 3231 in the back lower decoration body unit 3230 is slidably inserted in the raising / lowering slit 3217b formed in the front end side of each raising / lowering arm 3217, the raising / lowering arm 3217's By rotating so that the tip side moves upward, the back lower decorative body unit 3230 moves upward via the action pin 3231c.

  In this way, by rotating the left and right elevating cam members 3215 in opposite directions from each other by the pair of lower elevating drive motors 3212 from the normal state, the lower back decorative body unit is interposed via the left and right elevating arms 3217. 3230 can be moved upward. When the elevating pin 3215b of each elevating cam member 3215 revolves to the upper contact point (top dead center) that contacts the central axis of the drive slit 3217a in the elevating arm 3217 with respect to the revolution locus of the elevating pin 3215b, The decorative body unit 3230 is in the most elevated state. Thereafter, when each lifting pin 3215b further revolves and comes into contact with the proximal end of the drive slit 3217a, the back lifting drive motor 3212 stops and the revolution of the lifting pin 3215b also stops. Thereby, it will be in the state of the raising position which the back lower decorative body unit 3230 moved upwards from the descent | fall position (refer FIG. 149 grade | etc.,).

  In this raised position state, when a load from the lower back decorative unit 3230 that moves the tip of the lifting arm 3217 downward acts on the lifting pin 3215b via the drive slit 3217a, the lifting pin 3215b moves downward. Although it is going to revolve in the direction to move, the raising / lowering pin 3215b of the right and left raising / lowering cam member 3215 is contacting the edge part of the base end side of the drive slit 3217a in the raising / lowering arm 3217 beyond a top dead center. For this reason, the elevating pin 3215b cannot revolve any more and is held (locked) in the raised position. Thereby, the load of the back lower decorative body unit 3230 does not act on the back lower lift drive motor 3212 via the lift cam member 3215, and no load is applied to the back lower lift drive motor 3212.

  The back bottom movable effect unit 3200 moves the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 between the separation position and the approach position even when the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 is moved to the raised position. And can be decorated with the light emission as described above.

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (b) is the rear left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit as seen from the front after disassembling each main member. FIG. 144 shows the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every member and was seen from back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back left decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is the back left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right decoration body unit of the back right decoration body unit of the back right movable production unit, and was seen from back.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the upper part of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and extends to the left and right, and on the left side of the front upper part of the left unit base 3301. A slide rail unit 3302 that is attached and expandable in the left-right direction, a back left decorative body unit 3350 having an upper part attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3302, and an upper front surface of the back left decorative body unit 3350 are covered. A left unit cover 3303 attached to the front side of the left unit base 3301.

  The left unit cover 3303 has a guide slit 3303a penetrating in the front-rear direction extending horizontally to the right from the vicinity of the left end of the left unit cover 3303 and then extending obliquely to the lower right. In the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303, a guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 is slidably inserted.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper right corner of the front of the left unit cover 3303 as viewed from the front. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3305 attached to the rotating shaft of the back left drive motor 3304, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3306 meshing with the drive gear 3305 from below, and a first transmission gear A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3307 meshed with 3306 from the slightly left side in front view, and a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3308 meshed with the second transmission gear 3307 from the slightly left side in front view. The fourth transmission gear 3309 meshing with the third transmission gear 3308 at the same height as the second transmission gear 3307 from the left side when viewed from the front, and the fourth transmission gear 3309 in front. And a, a fifth transmission gear 3310 meshing with the height between the left and the first transmission gear 3306 and the second transmission gear 3307. The fifth transmission gear 3310 meshes with the rack gear 3351a of the rack member 3351 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 from the upper side.

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is separated from the left and right back left relay boards 3311 attached to the left side when viewed from the front in the upper front portion of the left unit cover 3303 and the rear face of the back left relay board 3311. A pair of a first movement detection sensor 3312 and a second movement detection sensor 3313 (see FIG. 144) that detect the movement of the back left decorative body unit 3350 in the left-right direction, and a lower front portion of the left unit cover 3303. A cable cover 3314 holding a flat cable (not shown) that is attached near the left end of the front view and connects the back left relay board 3311 and the back left decoration board 3355 of the back left decoration body unit 3350; It has. The back left relay board 3311 includes a back left drive motor 3304, a first movement detection sensor 3312, a second movement detection sensor 3313, a back left decoration board 3355 of the back left decoration body unit 3350, an effect drive board 3032, and a motor drive board. The connection with the terminal 3033 is relayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the back left decorative body unit 3350 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3302. Rack member 3351, a flat slide base 3352 having an upper part attached to the front surface of rack member 3351 and extending vertically, and a shaft attached to the front side of slide base 3352 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A vertically extending flat decorative base 3353, a translucent back left decorative body 3354 attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3353 and having a three-dimensional decoration, and a back left decorative A back left decorative board 3355 mounted between the body 3354 and the decorative body base 3353 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; Decorative substrate 3355 and Urahidari decorative body 3354 and the partition member 3356 which is mounted between, and a diffusing lens member 3357 attached to the front surface of the partitioning member 3356, the.

  The rack member 3351 extends left and right on the lower surface and meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3310. The rack member 3351 protrudes forward from the front end of the front surface in the form of a flat plate, and includes a first movement detection sensor 3312 and a second movement detection. A detection piece 3351b detected by the sensor 3313. The detection piece 3351b passes through the slide base 3352 and protrudes forward.

  The slide base 3352 is formed of a metal plate, and has a mounting shaft 3352a that protrudes forward in a columnar shape at the lower right corner when viewed from the front. A decorative body base 3353 is rotatably attached to an attachment shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352.

  The decorative body base 3353 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically longer than the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The decorative body base 3353 penetrates back and forth at the position of about 1/5 of the total height downward from the upper end near the right end in front view, and a mounting shaft hole 3353a into which the mounting shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. And a guide pin 3353b that is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303, and is formed in a flat plate shape at the lower end and the back box 3010. The guide piece 3353c is slidably inserted into the guide groove 3010f. The decoration body base 3353 can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the attachment shaft 3352a by attaching the attachment shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352 to the attachment shaft hole 3353a via a pair of bushes 3358. it can.

  The back left decorative body 3354 is attached to a portion between the mounting shaft hole 3353a and the guide piece 3353c on the front surface of the decorative body base 3353, and is approximately the same height as the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. Is formed. The back left decorative body 3354 includes a middle decorative portion 3354a extending vertically with a predetermined width at the center in the left-right direction, and a peripheral decorative portion 3354b formed on both left and right sides of the middle decorative portion 3354a. The interior decoration part 3354a is formed in the shape of the glass slide which gave the surface of the colorless and transparent member the embossing. The peripheral decorative portion 3354b is formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member. This back left decorative body 3354 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back front upper left decorative body 3112.

  The back left decorative substrate 3355 is formed in a size corresponding to the back left decorative body 3354, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions behind the middle decorative portion 3354a and the peripheral decorative portion 3354b. The back left decorative board 3355 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to appropriately emit light, thereby decorating the entire back left decorative body 3354 with a predetermined color, or providing an inner decorative portion 3354a and a peripheral decorative portion 3354b. It can be decorated separately.

  The partition member 3356 is formed of an opaque white member so as to correspond to the middle decorative portion 3354a in the back left decorative body 3354. The partition member 3356 has a plurality of through holes so that the LEDs on the back left decorative substrate 3355 face forward. The diffusing lens member 3357 is formed of a transparent member. Further, the diffusion lens member 3357 has a plurality of minute lenses formed on the front surface, and diffuses light from the LED facing forward from the plurality of through holes of the partition member 3356 in the back left decorative substrate 3355 to diffuse the back left. It is possible to irradiate the inner decoration portion 3354a of the decoration body 3354 from the rear side.

  Next, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state in which the back left decorative body unit 3350 is located on the leftmost side in the front view (retracted position state) (see FIG. 118 and the like). In this normal state, the back left decorative body unit 3350 (back left decorative body 3354) extends vertically, and the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 is in front of the guide slit 3303a in the left unit cover 3303. Located at the left end of the view.

  In a normal state, the rack gear 3351a extending to the left and right of the rack member 3351 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3310 in the vicinity of the right end in front view. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3351b of the rack member 3351 is detected by the first movement detection sensor 3312 on the left side in front view attached to the back left relay board 3311.

  In this normal state, the fifth transmission gear 3310 is driven by the back left drive motor 3304 via the drive gear 3305, the first transmission gear 3306, the second transmission gear 3307, the third transmission gear 3308, and the fourth transmission gear 3309. When rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the rack gear 3351a meshing with the fifth transmission gear 3310 moves the rack member 3351 to the right when viewed from the front, and at the same time, the slide rail unit 3302 extends to the right. It becomes. When the rack member 3351 moves to the right in the front view, the slide base 3352 attached to the rack member 3351 moves together to the right in the front view and is attached to the attachment shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352. The back left decorative body 3354 moves to the right in front view via the decorative body base 3353. That is, the back left decorative body unit 3350 as a whole moves to the right in the front view by the movement of the rack member 3351 to the right in the front view.

  Then, as the back left decorative body unit 3350 moves to the right in the front view, the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 slides in the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303 to the right in the front view. Become. A portion where the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 extends horizontally in the guide slit 3303a when the back left decorative body unit 3350 moves from the retracted position, which is a moving end to the left in the front view, to the right in the front view. Since the height relationship between the mounting shaft 3352a and the guide pin 3353b does not change, the decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) moves to the right in the front view while maintaining a vertically extended posture. It will be. The movement to the right in the front view with the decorative body base 3353 extending vertically is continued until the guide pin 3353b reaches the right end (first appearance position) in the front view of the part extending horizontally in the guide slit 3303a. . In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3304 can be stopped when the guide pin 3353b reaches the right end in the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3303a (see FIG. 151). ).

  The back left decorative body unit 3350 moves to the right in front view from the retracted position, and the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 moves diagonally to the lower right across the right end of the guide slit 3303a extending horizontally in front view. When reaching the extended part, the guide pin 3353b is guided downward by the part extending obliquely lower right of the guide slit 3303a and moved downward. When the guide pin 3353b is guided downward by the guide slit 3303a, the decorative body base 3353 rotates about the mounting shaft 3352a (mounting shaft hole 3353a) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the guide pin The decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) is inclined by an amount corresponding to the downward movement of 3353b.

  Then, the back left decorative body unit 3350 moves to the right in the front view, and the detection piece 3351b of the rack member 3351 is detected by the second movement detection sensor 3313 on the right side in the front view attached to the back left relay board 3311. Then, the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3304 stops and the movement of the back left decorative body unit 3350 to the right in the front view stops. In a state where the back left decorative body unit 3350 is moved to the rightmost in the front view (second appearance position), the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 is the front surface serving as the lower end of the guide slit 3303a in the left unit cover 3303. The decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) is located at the right end of the view, and is in a state of being most inclined in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 152, etc.).

  In the state where the back left decorative body 3354 of the back left decorative body unit 3350 is most inclined (the state of the second appearance position), the inclination of the middle decorative portion 3354a of the back left decorative body 3354 is in the back upper left decorative body 3112. The inclination of the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 when the decorative portion 3112a and the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 are in the approach position is substantially the same. Accordingly, the back left decorative body 3354 at the second appearance position can form a continuous decoration with the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back lower left decorative body 3253 at the approach position. (See FIG. 153 and the like).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back left decorative body unit 3350 can be moved further to the right in the front view from the second appearance position, and the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303 can be moved in the front view. It is good also as a form extended horizontally horizontally from the lower end extended to the lower right. Accordingly, when the back left decorative unit 3350 is further moved to the right in front view from the second appearance position, the decorative base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) remains tilted without changing its inclination. In the state, it can be moved to the third appearance position on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 154).

  Regardless of the movement position of the back left decorative body unit 3350, the back left movable effect unit 3300 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left decorative board 3355 to emit light as appropriate, so that the entire back left decorative body 3354 is predetermined. It is possible to decorate the light with a color (for example, red) or to decorate the middle decorative portion 3354a and the peripheral decorative portion 3354b with a different color.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. The back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the upper part of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and extends to the right and left on the right side of the front upper part of the right unit base 3401. A slide rail unit 3402 that is attached and expandable in the left-right direction, a back right decorative body unit 3450 having an upper portion attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3402, and an upper front surface of the back right decorative body unit 3450 are covered. A right unit cover 3403 attached to the front side of the right unit base 3401.

  The right unit cover 3403 has a guide slit 3403a penetrating in the front-rear direction extending from the vicinity of the right end of the right unit cover 3403 to the left horizontally and then extending obliquely to the lower left, on the right side when viewed from the front. In the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403, a guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 is slidably inserted.

  Also, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left corner of the right unit cover 3403 when viewed from the front, and the back right drive motor 3404 has a rotating shaft protruding between the right unit base 3401 and the right unit cover 3403. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3405 attached to the rotating shaft of the back right drive motor 3404, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3406 meshing with the drive gear 3405 from below, and a first transmission gear A spur gear-like second transmission gear 3407 meshed with the right side 3406 from the lower side of the front view, and a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3408 meshed with the second transmission gear 3407 from the right side of the front side. The fourth transmission gear 3409 meshed with the third transmission gear 3408 at the same height as the second transmission gear 3407 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the fourth transmission gear 3409 with the front surface And a, a fifth transmission gear 3410 meshing with the height between the right and the first transmission gear 3406 and the second transmission gear 3407. The fifth transmission gear 3410 meshes with the rack gear 3451a of the rack member 3451 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 from above.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is separated from the left and right back relay boards 3411 attached to the right side of the front view of the upper front portion of the right unit cover 3403 and the rear surface of the back right relay board 3411. A pair of a first movement detection sensor 3412 and a second movement detection sensor 3413 (see FIG. 144) that detect the movement of the back right decorative body unit 3450 in the left-right direction, and a lower part of the front surface of the right unit cover 3403. A cable cover 3414 holding a flat cable (not shown) that is attached near the right end in front view and connects the back right relay board 3411 and the back right decoration board 3455 of the back right decoration body unit 3450; It has. The back right relay board 3411 includes a back right drive motor 3404, a first movement detection sensor 3412, a second movement detection sensor 3413, a back right decoration board 3455 of the back right decoration body unit 3450, an effect drive board 3032, and a motor drive board. The connection with the terminal 3033 is relayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the back right decorative body unit 3450 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3402. The rack member 3451, a flat plate-like slide base 3452 that is attached to the front surface of the rack member 3451 and extending vertically, and a shaft that extends back and forth on the front surface side of the slide base 3452 so as to be rotatable around the axis. A flat decorative body base 3453 extending vertically, a back right decorative body 3454 having a translucency attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3453 and forming a three-dimensional decoration, and a back right decoration A back right decorative board 3455 mounted between the body 3454 and the decorative body base 3453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A partition member 3456 attached between the decorative substrate 3455 and the back right decorative body 3454, and a diffusing lens member 3457 attached to the front surface of the partitioning member 3456, the.

  The rack member 3451 extends leftward and rightward on the lower surface, and a rack gear 3451a meshing with the fifth transmission gear 3410. The rack member 3451 protrudes forward from the right end of the front surface when viewed from the front. The first movement detection sensor 3412 and the second movement detection. And a detection piece 3451b detected by the sensor 3413. The detection piece 3451b penetrates through the slide base 3452 and protrudes forward.

  The slide base 3452 is formed of a metal plate, and has a mounting shaft 3452a that protrudes forward in a columnar shape in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. A decorative body base 3453 is rotatably attached to an attachment shaft 3453a of the slide base 3492.

  The decorative body base 3453 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically longer than the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The decorative body base 3453 penetrates back and forth at the position of about 1/5 of the total height downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front. And a guide pin 3453b that is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403 and a flat box at the lower end. The guide piece 3453c is slidably inserted into the guide groove 3010f. The decoration body base 3453 can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the attachment shaft 3452a by attaching the attachment shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452 to the attachment shaft hole 3453a via a pair of bushes 3458. it can.

  The back right decorative body 3454 is attached to a portion between the mounting shaft hole 3453a and the guide piece 3453c on the front surface of the decorative body base 3453, and is approximately the same height as the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. Is formed. The back right decorative body 3454 includes a middle decorative portion 3454a extending vertically with a predetermined width at the center in the left-right direction, and a peripheral decorative portion 3454b formed on both left and right sides of the middle decorative portion 3454a. The inside decoration part 3454a is formed in the shape of the sliding glass which gave the surface of the colorless and transparent member the embossing. The peripheral decorative portion 3454b is formed in a shape imitating a flame with a red transparent member. The back right decorative body 3454 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the front right upper decorative body 3113.

  The back right decorative substrate 3455 is formed in a size corresponding to the back right decorative body 3454, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions behind the middle decorative portion 3454a and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b. The back right decorative board 3455 appropriately illuminates the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface so that the entire back right decorative body 3454 is illuminated with a predetermined color, or the middle decorative portion 3454a and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b are provided. It can be decorated separately.

  The partition member 3456 is formed of an opaque white member so as to correspond to the middle decorative portion 3454a in the back right decorative body 3454. The partition member 3456 has a plurality of through holes so that the LEDs on the back right decorative substrate 345 face forward. The diffusing lens member 3457 is formed of a transparent member. Further, the diffusion lens member 3457 has a plurality of minute lenses formed on the front surface, and diffuses light from the LED facing forward from the plurality of through holes of the partition member 3456 in the back right decorative substrate 3455 to back right. It is possible to irradiate the middle decorative portion 3454a of the decorative body 3454 from the rear side.

  Next, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back-right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state where the back-right decorative body unit 3450 is located on the rightmost side in the front view (retracted position state) (see FIG. 118 and the like). In this normal state, the back right decorative body unit 3450 (back right decorative body 3454) extends vertically, and the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 is in front of the guide slit 3403a in the right unit cover 3403. Located at the right end of the view.

  In a normal state, the rack gear 3451a extending to the left and right of the rack member 3451 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3410 in the vicinity of the left end in front view. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3451b of the rack member 3451 is detected by the first movement detection sensor 3412 on the right side in front view attached to the back right relay board 3411.

  In this normal state, the fifth transmission gear 3410 is driven by the back right drive motor 3404 via the drive gear 3405, the first transmission gear 3406, the second transmission gear 3407, the third transmission gear 3408, and the fourth transmission gear 3409. When driven to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the rack gear 3451a meshing with the fifth transmission gear 3410 moves the rack member 3451 to the left when viewed from the front, and at the same time, the slide rail unit 3402 extends to the left. It will be. When the rack member 3451 moves to the left in the front view, the slide base 3452 attached to the rack member 3451 moves together to the left in the front view, and is attached to the attachment shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452. The back right decorative body 3454 moves to the left in the front view via the decorative body base 3453. In other words, the back right decorative body unit 3450 as a whole moves to the left in the front view as the rack member 3451 moves to the left in the front view.

  As the back right decorative body unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view, the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 slides in the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403 to the left in the front view. Become. When the back right decorative body unit 3450 moves from the retracted position, which is the movement end to the right in the front view, to the left in the front view, the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 extends horizontally in the guide slit 3403a. Since the height relationship between the mounting shaft 3453a and the guide pin 3453b does not change, the decorative body base 3453 (the back right decorative body 3454) moves to the left in the front view while maintaining a vertically extending posture. It will be. The leftward movement in the front view with the decorative body base 3453 extending vertically is continued until the guide pin 3453b reaches the left end (first appearance position) in the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3403a. . In the back right movable effect unit 3400, when the guide pin 3453b reaches the left end in the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3403a, the rotational drive of the back right drive motor 3404 can be stopped (see FIG. 151). ).

  The back right decorative body unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view from the retracted position, and the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 extends obliquely to the lower left beyond the left end in front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3403a. When the guide pin 3453b reaches the position, the guide pin 3453b is guided downward by the part extending obliquely to the lower left of the guide slit 3403a and moves downward. When the guide pin 3453b is guided downward by the guide slit 3403a, the decorative body base 3453 rotates around the attachment shaft 3452a (attachment shaft hole 3453a) in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the guide pin 3453b. The decorative body base 3453 (the back right decorative body 3454) is tilted by the amount of the downward movement.

  Then, the back right decorative body unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view, and the detection piece 3451b of the rack member 3451 is detected by the second movement detection sensor 3413 on the left side in the front view attached to the back right relay board 3411. Then, the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3404 stops and the movement of the back right decorative body unit 3450 to the left in the front view stops. In a state where the back right decorative body unit 3450 has moved to the left most in the front view (second appearance position), the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 is the front surface serving as the lower end of the guide slit 3403a in the right unit cover 3403. The decorative body base 3453 (back right decorative body 3454) is located at the left end of the view, and is in a state of being inclined most obliquely in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 152 and the like).

  In the state in which the back right decorative body 3454 of the back right decorative body unit 3450 is most inclined (the state of the second appearance position), the inclination of the middle decorative portion 3454a of the back right decorative body 3454 is in the back upper right decorative body 3113. The inclination of the middle decorative portion 3263a of the back lower right decorative body 3263 when the decorative portion 3113a and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are in the approach position is substantially the same. Therefore, the back right decorative body 3454 at the second appearance position can form a continuous decoration with the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 at the approach position. (See FIG. 153 and the like).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right decorative body unit 3450 can be moved further to the left in the front view from the second appearance position, and the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403 can be moved in the front view. It is good also as a form extended horizontally from the lower end extended to the lower left to the front view left side. Accordingly, when the back right decorative body unit 3450 is further moved to the left in the front view from the second appearance position, the decorative body base 3453 (back right decorative body 3454) remains tilted without changing its inclination. In the state, it can be moved to the third appearance position on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 154).

  Regardless of the movement position of the back right decorative body unit 3450, the back right movable effect unit 3400 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decorative board 3455 to appropriately emit light, thereby causing the entire back right decorative body 3454 to have a predetermined shape. It is possible to decorate with light (for example, red) or to decorate the middle decorative portion 3454a and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b with different colors.

[5-9f. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 (a) is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 147 (b) is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit as viewed from the back. The back middle movable effect unit 3500 is attached between the front front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable effect unit 3300, and the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. It has been.

  The back middle movable effect unit 3500 includes a gate-shaped unit base 3501 formed in a U-shape with the lower part open, and a back middle left decorative body unit arranged on the left side in front view in front of the upper part of the unit base 3501. 3510, a back middle right decorative body unit 3520 which is connected to the right end side of the back middle left decorative body unit 3510 so as to be relatively rotatable, and is arranged on the right side in front view in front of the upper portion of the unit base 3501; The back center middle decorative body unit 3530 is attached to a portion where the body unit 3510 and the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 are connected to each other so as to be relatively rotatable. A back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 that elevates and lowers the back center left decorative body unit 3510, and a unit base A back right in elevation driving mechanism 3550 for vertically moving the back in the right decorative body unit 3520 is attached to the left-right direction right at the top front of the scan 3501, and a.

  Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is a pair of back middle left side decorative body units that are attached to the upper part of the unit base 3501 so as to be rotatable around axes that are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the front-rear direction. 3560 and the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 and the back which is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3501 and rotates the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 (and the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570). Medium side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580.

  The back middle left decorative body unit 3510 of the back middle movable effect unit 3500 has a translucent back middle left decorative body 3511 in which the decoration of a predetermined character (here, the letter “K”) is formed in a relief shape. And a flat left decorative body base 3512 attached to the rear side of the back center left decorative body 3511 and a plurality of front decorative left base bodies 3511 and a back central left decorative body 3511. And a back center left decorative board (not shown) on which the LED is mounted.

  The left decorative body base 3512 has a lifting slit 3512a into which a lifting pin 3546a of a left lifting arm 3546 in the back middle left lifting drive mechanism 3540 is slidably inserted, and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. An attachment shaft portion (not shown) to which the tip of the left link arm 3547 of 3540 is attached so as to be relatively rotatable, a disk-like rear support portion 3512b extending rearward of the back center central decorative body unit 3530, and a rear support A connecting cylindrical shaft portion (not shown) that protrudes in an annular shape on the front surface of the portion and is rotatably inserted into a connecting piece (not shown) of the right decorative body base 3522 in the back middle right decorative body unit 3520. Yes. A back center central decorative body unit 3530 is attached to the rear support portion 3512 b of the left decorative body base 3512.

  The back middle right decorative body unit 3520 has a translucent back middle right decorative body 3521 in which the decoration of a predetermined character (here, the letter “F”) is formed in a relief shape, and the back middle right decorative body. 3521 is a flat right decorative body base 3522 attached to the rear side of 3521, and a back part which is attached between the right decorative body base 3522 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A middle right decorative substrate (not shown).

  The right decorative body base 3522 includes a lift slit 3522a into which a lift pin 3556a of a right lift arm 3556 in the back middle right lift drive mechanism 3550 is slidably inserted, and a rear middle right lift drive mechanism protruding in a columnar shape rearward. An attachment shaft portion (not shown) to which the tip of the right link arm 3557 of 3550 is attached so as to be relatively rotatable, and extends forward of the rear support portion 3512b of the left decorative body base 3512 behind the back center central decorative body unit 3530. And an annular connecting piece (not shown) into which the connecting cylinder shaft portion of the left decorative body base 3512 is rotatably inserted.

  The back center decorative body unit 3530 is arranged in front of the rear support portion 3512b of the left decorative body base 3512 of the back center left decorative body unit 3510, and a predetermined character (here, the letter “O”) is decorated. A disc-shaped back center decorative body 3531 having a light-transmitting shape formed in a relief shape, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface are attached to the front side of the rear support portion 3512b on the rear side of the back center central decorative body 3531 Is mounted on the back center decorative board (not shown) and the back support portion 3512b extends from the center of the rear surface of the back center decorative body 3531 to the rear support portion 3512b. A shaft member (not shown) that is rotatably attached, a spur gear-like driven gear (not shown) attached to the rear end of the shaft member, and a rear support portion 3512b. And Urachu central drive motor (not shown), Urachu central drive motor is mounted to a rotating shaft driven gear and meshes with that spur toothed drive gear (not shown) is provided with a.

  The back center decorative body 3531 of the back center decorative body unit 3530 can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth around the disc-shaped center by a back center driving motor (not shown). Further, the back center decorative body 3531 is formed with a sub decorative portion 3531a capable of forming a part of the characters of the back center left decorative body 3511.

  The back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is attached to the upper left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3501 when viewed from the front, and has a back center left drive motor 3541 whose rotating shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3501, and back center left A spur gear-shaped left drive gear 3542 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3541, a large-diameter first gear portion meshed with the left drive gear 3542 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the first gear portion rotating together. A transmission gear member 3543 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501, and a second gear portion of the transmission gear member 3543 that meshes from the right side of the front view. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3544 rotatably attached to the rear side of the cage unit base 3501, and a gear portion 35 meshing with the transmission gear 3544 from the right side as viewed from the front. 5a and a left crank that has a cylindrical drive pin 3545b that protrudes forward through a unit base 3501 from a position different from the gear portion 3545a, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501 And a member 3545.

  The drive pin 3545b of the left crank member 3545 protrudes forward through an arc-shaped slit formed in the unit base 3501.

  Further, the back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is rotatable about a shaft whose base end extending in a rod shape at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction in front view near the upper end of the front upper portion of the unit base 3501 extends forward and backward. An elongated drive slit that is attached and extends from the vicinity of the proximal end toward the distal end and penetrates forward and backward, and the drive pin 3545b of the left crank member 3545 is slidably inserted. A lifting pin that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front and is slidably inserted into a lifting slit 3512a in the left decorative body base 3512 of the back center left decorative body unit 3510. A left lifting arm 3546 having a link mounting portion projecting forward in a cylindrical shape in the vicinity, and a link mounting portion of the left lifting arm 3546 With side is rotatably mounted, and a, a left link arm 3547 that is rotatably mounted to the mounting shaft portion of the left ornamental body base 3512 of the distal side back in the left decorations unit 3510.

  The left lifting arm 3546 includes a connecting gear portion meshing with a connecting gear portion of the right lifting arm 3556 on the arcuate outer peripheral surface on the base end side. The left link arm 3547 extends upward from the link attachment portion (intermediate) of the left lifting arm 3546, then extends ahead of the tip of the left lifting arm 3546 along the left lifting arm 3546, and then bends downward. It is formed in the shape. The left link arm 3547 has a flat detection piece 3547a extending outward from the vicinity of the tip.

  Further, the back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3501 and detects the elevating of the back center left decorative body unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3547a of the left link arm 3547. A sensor 3548 and a left assist spring (not shown) that urges the tip of the left lifting arm 3546 to rotate upward in the movement direction.

  In the normal state, the back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is such that the left elevating arm 3546 extends horizontally so that the front end side is leftward in front view with respect to the base end side, and the left link The detection piece 3547a of the arm 3547 is detected by the left lift detection sensor 3548. When the left crank member 3545 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back middle left drive motor 3541 through the left drive gear 3542, the transmission gear member 3543, and the transmission gear 3544 from this normal state, it revolves. The left lifting arm 3546 can be rotated counterclockwise by the driving pin 3545b when viewed from the front.

  In this example, the left lifting arm 3546 can be rotated between an angle range of 90 degrees between a horizontally extended state and a vertically extended state. By rotating the left raising / lowering arm 3546, the back center left decorative body unit 3510 attached to the tip can be raised and lowered. Further, the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 has a back middle left drive motor because the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 meshes with the connecting gear portion of the right elevating arm 3556 in the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550. When the left raising / lowering arm 3546 is rotated by 3541, the right raising / lowering arm 3556 can be rotated in a symmetric opposite direction, and the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 can also be raised / lowered.

  The back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is attached to the front upper right corner of the front side of the unit base 3501 and has a back middle right drive motor 3551 in which the rotation shaft penetrates the unit base 3501 and protrudes rearward. A spur gear-shaped right drive gear 3552 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3551, a large-diameter first gear portion meshed with the right drive gear 3552 from the left side when viewed from the front, and the first gear portion rotating together. A transmission gear member 3553 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501, and a second gear portion of the transmission gear member 3553 that meshes from the left side of the front view. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3554 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the cage unit base 3501 and a gear portion 35 that meshes with the transmission gear 3554 from the left side when viewed from the front. 5a and a right crank that has a cylindrical drive pin 3555b that protrudes forward through the unit base 3501 from a position different from the gear portion 3545a, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501. A member 3555.

  The drive pin 3555b of the right crank member 3555 protrudes forward through an arc-shaped slit formed in the unit base 3501.

  Further, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is rotatable about a shaft whose base end extending in a rod shape at a position slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front near the upper end of the upper front of the unit base 3501. A long-holed drive slit that is attached and extends from the vicinity of the proximal end toward the distal end and penetrates forward and backward, and the drive pin 3555b of the right crank member 3555 is slidably inserted. A lifting pin that protrudes in a cylindrical shape forward from the back and is slidably inserted into a lifting slit 3522a in the right decorative body base 3522 of the back middle right decorative body unit 3520. Based on the right lifting arm 3556 having a link mounting portion protruding forward in a columnar shape in the vicinity, and the link mounting portion of the right lifting arm 3556 With side is rotatably mounted, and a distal end side and the right link arm 3557 that is rotatably attached to the mounting shaft portion of the right ornamental body base 3522 of the back in the right decorative body unit 3520, the.

  The right elevating arm 3556 includes a connecting gear portion meshing with the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 on the arcuate outer peripheral surface on the proximal end side. The right link arm 3557 extends upward from the link attachment portion (intermediate) of the right lifting arm 3556 and then extends downward from the tip of the right lifting arm 3556 along the right lifting arm 3556 and then bends downward. It is formed in the shape. The right link arm 3557 has a flat detection piece 3557a extending outward from the vicinity of the tip.

  Further, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3501, and detects the elevating of the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 by detecting the detection piece 3557a of the right link arm 3557. A sensor 3558 and a right assist spring (not shown) that urges the tip of the right lifting arm 3556 to rotate upward in the movement direction.

  In the normal state, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is configured such that the right elevating arm 3556 extends horizontally so that the distal end side is rightward in front view with respect to the base end side, and the right link The detection piece 3557a of the arm 3557 is detected by the right lifting detection sensor 3558. When the right crank member 3555 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the right middle drive motor 3551 from the normal state via the right drive gear 3552, the transmission gear member 3553, and the transmission gear 3554, the revolution The right elevating arm 3556 can be rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the driving pin 3555b.

  In this example, the right lifting arm 3556 can be rotated between an angle range of 90 degrees between a horizontally extended state and a vertically extended state. By rotating the right lifting arm 3556, the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 attached to the tip can be lifted and lowered. Further, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is configured such that the connecting gear portion of the right elevating arm 3556 meshes with the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 in the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540. When the right elevating arm 3556 is rotated by 3551, the left elevating arm 3546 can be rotated in a symmetrical opposite direction, and the back center left decorative body unit 3510 can also be raised and lowered.

  The back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 of the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is disposed on the front side of the left side of the unit base 3501 when viewed from the front, and has a flat plate-shaped left side base 3561 whose outer shape is substantially spindle-shaped. A back center left side decoration body 3562 having translucency attached to the front surface of the left side base 3561 and having a relief-like decoration imitating a wing formed on the front surface, and a back center left side decoration body 3562 and a left A back middle left side decorative board 3563 that is mounted between the side base 3561 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. From the upper end of the left side base 3561 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the left side base 3561. It extends to the right when viewed from the front, and the vicinity of the tip is closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front near the lower end of the upper rear surface of the unit base 3501 A left side support arms 3564 which are rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth position, and a.

  The left side base 3561 has a protruding pin 3561a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center in the longitudinal direction to the rear, and a longitudinal end from which the left side support arm 3564 extends in the opposite direction to the left side support arm 3564. And a flat plate-like detection piece 3561b that protrudes. This projecting pin 3561a is pressed in the left-right direction by a drive arm 3583 of a back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 described later. The detection piece 3561b of the left side base 3561 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3586 of the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580.

  The back middle left side decorative body 3562 is provided with a plated layer having a translucent metallic luster on the surface. Further, the back middle left side decorative body 3562 can emit light with any color by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back middle left side decorative board 3563.

  The left side support arm 3564 includes an arcuate transmission gear portion 3564a centering on a portion that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3501 on the distal end side (right end side in front view). The transmission gear portion 3564a of the left side support arm 3564 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570.

  When the left side support arm 3564 extends horizontally, the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 is arranged so that the back middle left side decorative body 3562 is vertically in front of the left side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. It is in an extended state. In this state, the detection piece 3561b of the left side base 3561 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3586 of the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580. In this back middle left side decorative body unit 3560, the lower end of the back middle left side decorative body 3562 moves to the right in the front view around the front end side of the left side support arm 3564 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3501. It can be turned in the direction.

  The back middle right side decorative unit 3570 of the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is disposed on the front side of the left side of the unit base 3501 when viewed from the front, and has a flat plate-shaped right side base 3571 whose outer shape is substantially spindle-shaped. A back middle right side decorative body 3572 having a translucency attached to the front surface of the right side base 3571 and having a relief-like decoration imitating a wing on the front surface, and a back middle right side decorative body 3572 and a right A back middle right side decorative board 3573 mounted between the side base 3571 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and from the upper end of the right side base 3571 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the right side base 3571. It extends to the left when viewed from the front, and the tip is near the lower end of the upper rear surface of the unit base 3501 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front A right support arm 3574 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth position, and a.

  The right side base 3571 has a protruding pin 3571a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction to the rear. The projecting pin 3571a is pressed in the left-right direction by a support arm 3584 of a back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 described later. The back middle right side decorative body 3572 has a plated layer having a translucent metallic luster on the surface. Further, the back middle right side decorative body 3572 can be light-decorated in an arbitrary color by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back middle right side decorative board 3573.

  The right side support arm 3574 includes an arcuate transmission gear portion 3574a centered on a portion that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3501 on the distal end side (left end side in front view). The transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3564a of the left side support arm 3564 in the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560.

  In the back middle right side decorative unit 3570, in the state where the right side support arm 3574 extends horizontally, the back middle right side decorative unit 3572 is vertically in front of the right side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. It is in an extended state. In the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570, the lower end of the back middle right side decorative body 3572 moves to the left in the front view around the front end side of the right side support arm 3574 rotatably attached to the unit base 3501. It can be turned in the direction.

  The back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 of the back middle movable effect unit 3500 includes a back middle side drive motor 3581 attached to the lower left corner of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape, and a back middle side. A spur gear-shaped side drive gear (not shown) attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3581 and a shaft attached to the front side of the left side of the unit base 3501 so as to be rotatable around the shaft above the side drive gear. The side drive crank 3582 rotates in the opposite direction to the side drive gear by the rotation of the side drive gear, and rotates about the axis extending forward and backward on the front side of the left side of the unit base 3501 above the swivel range of the side drive crank 3582 Back side center left side decorative body unit 3560 is attached by rotation of side drive crank 3582. It includes definitive a drive arm 3583 for pressing the protruding pin 3561a on the left side the base 3561 to the left and right direction.

  Further, the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 is rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at the same height as the drive arm 3583 on the front right side of the front side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. The support arm 3584 that is attached and capable of pressing the protruding pin 3571a of the right side base 3571 in the back right side decorative body unit 3570 in the left-right direction, and the support arm 3588 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The urging side support spring 3585 and a rotation detection sensor 3586 that is attached to the upper left side of the unit base 3501 in front view and can detect the detection piece 3561b of the left side base 3561 in the back middle left side decorative unit 3560. And.

  The back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 is driven by the back middle side drive motor 3581 to rotate the drive arm 3583 via the side drive gear and the side drive crank 3582, so that the drive arm 3583 rotates the back middle left side. The entire back middle left side decorative unit 3560 can be rotated by pressing the protruding pin 3561a of the left side base 3561 in the decorative unit 3560 in the left-right direction. Since the transmission gear portion 3574a of the left side support arm 3564 is meshed with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decoration unit 3570, the back middle left side decoration unit 3560 is When the middle left side decorative body unit 3560 is rotated, the back middle right decorative body unit 3570 can be rotated in the opposite direction.

  When the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 rotates, the projecting pin 3571a of the right side base 3571 moves relatively in the left-right direction, so that the support arm moves along with the movement of the projecting pin 3571a in the left-right direction. 3584 rotates against or supported by the biasing force of the side support spring 3585. That is, the rotation of the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 can be supported by the side support spring 3585 via the support arm 3584.

  Next, the operation of the back movable movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 has a back center left decorative body unit 3510 and a back middle right decorative body in front of the upper side of the gate-shaped unit base 3501 with the back middle central decorative body unit 3530 as the center. The unit 3520 and the back center decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side (retracted position). In a normal state, the back middle left side decoration body 3562 of the back middle left side decoration body unit 3560 and the back middle right side decoration body 3572 of the back middle right side decoration body unit 3570 are the same as those of the gate-type unit base 3501. In front of both the left and right sides, each extends vertically (retracted position).

  In this normal state, the back center left drive motor 3541 of the back center left lift drive mechanism 3540 and the back center right drive motor 3551 of the back center right lift drive mechanism 3550 are simultaneously rotated in different directions, respectively. When the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 extending horizontally are rotated in the counterclockwise direction of the front view and the clockwise direction of the front view, respectively, the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 are obtained. , And the back center decorative body 3531 moves downward.

  Since the back middle left decorative body unit 3510, the back middle right decorative body unit 3520, the left elevating arm 3546, and the right elevating arm 3556 are rotatably attached to each other, the whole is a pantograph type. It has a link structure. Further, between the back center left decorative body unit 3510, the left lifting arm 3546, and the left link arm 3547, and between the back center right decorative body unit 3520, the right lifting arm 3556, and the right link arm 3557, the back center Since the left decorative body unit 3510 and the left elevating arm 3546 and between the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 and the right elevating arm 3556 are rotatably and movably attached, respectively, the entire link structure is double. It has become. Thereby, the rotation range of the back middle left decorative body unit 3510 and the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 and the rotation range of the left lifting arm 3546 and the right lifting arm 3556 can be made different. In this example, the pair of left elevating arm 3546 and right elevating arm 3556 can be in a horizontal state, and the overall height can be lowered and compact when in the retracted position.

  When the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle central decorative body 3531 move downward, the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 are respectively in the back middle center. It rotates in the direction in which they approach each other around the decorative body 3531 (see FIGS. 155 and 156). When the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 are rotated to positions where they extend vertically, the back middle left drive motor 3541 and the back middle right drive motor 3551 are stopped, and the back middle left The downward movement of the decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 stops.

  When the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 extend vertically (in the appearance position), the back center decorative body 3531 is located at the lowest position, and the back center left decorative body 3511 and the back The middle right decorative body 3521 is in contact with each other on the upper side of the back center central decorative body 3531, and the overall shape is an inverted triangle with the back middle central decorative body 3531 as a vertex ( (See FIG. 156). In this state, when the back center decorative body 3531 is rotated by the back center driving motor and the sub decoration portion 3531a is stopped so as to coincide with the decoration of the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center left decorative body 3511, The player can show a predetermined logo decoration to the player by the middle right ornament 3521 and the back middle ornament 3531 (see FIG. 157). The back center decorative body 3531 can be rotated at any height by a back center drive motor.

  On the other hand, when the drive arm 3583 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back side drive motor 3581 in the normal state, the projecting pin 3561a of the left side base 3561 is pressed rightward when viewed from the front by the drive arm 3583. The entire back middle left side decorative unit 3560 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front so that the lower end of the back middle left side decorative body 3562 moves rightward when viewed from the front. This back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 has the transmission gear portion 3574a of the left side support arm 3564 meshed with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570. When the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 is moved to the front viewed clock so that the back middle right side decorative body 3572 moves leftward when viewed from the front. It will rotate in the direction of rotation.

  When the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 and the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 rotate about 45 degrees, the rotational drive of the back middle side drive motor 3581 stops, and the back middle left side decorative body 3562 and the back middle The right side decorative body 3572 is in an inclined state (appearance position state) so that the lower ends approach each other (see FIG. 158). As shown in FIG. 158, the back center left decorative body 3562 and the back center left decorative body 3562 are lowered with the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 lowered to the appearance position. When the middle right side decorative body 3572 is rotated to the appearance position, the back middle left side decorative body 3562 and the back middle right side decorative body 3572 extend outward from the left and right of the circular back middle central decorative body 3531. In this state, one large decorative body can be formed together with the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531.

[5-10. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 158. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board shown with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the lowered position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the close position. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board shown with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the raised position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the separated position. FIG. 150 is a front view of the game board shown with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the raised position and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the close position.

  FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board showing the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the first appearance position. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the second appearance position. FIG. 153 shows the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the approaching position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the lowered position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable It is a front view of the game board showing the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the effect unit as the second appearance position. FIG. 154 shows the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the approaching position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the raised position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the effect unit is the third appearance position.

  FIG. 155 is a game board showing the back center left decorative body unit, back center right decorative body unit, and back center central decorative body unit of the back middle movable effect unit in a state between the retracted position and the appearance position. FIG. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing the back center left decorative body unit, the back center right decorative body unit, and the back center central decorative body unit in the back middle movable effect unit in an appearance position. FIG. 157 shows the back center left decorative body unit, back center right decorative body unit, and back center central decorative body unit of the back center movable effect unit as the appearance position, and the sub decorative portion of the back center central decorative body as the back. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state matched with the decoration of the middle left decorative body. FIG. 158 shows the back center left decorative body unit, the back center right decorative body unit, and the back center central decorative body unit of the back center movable effect unit as the appearance positions, and the back decorative portion of the back center central decorative body as the back. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state made into the state matched with the decoration of the middle left decoration body, and making the back middle left side decoration body unit and the back middle right side decoration body unit into the appearance position.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the gaming area 5a is made colorless and transparent, and the opening of the panel board 1110 A starting unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a center accessory 2500 attached to 1112 are substantially entirely formed in a colorless and transparent manner, and are arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 through them. 3000 can be visually recognized. More specifically, the front upper left decorative body 3112, the front upper upper right decorative body 3113, and the front front upper arranged in a frame shape in the front front decorative unit 3100 through the transparent panel board 1110, the center accessory 2500, and the like. Middle decorative body 3114, back front left side decorative body 3116, back front right side decorative body 3117, back front left lower decorative body 3118, back front right lower decorative body 3119, back front lower middle decorative body 3168, back front and rear left decorative body 3169 The back and front right decorative body 3170 can be visually recognized, and the back lower decorative body unit 3230 is passed through the transparent first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 that close the frame of the back front decorative unit 3100. Each of the back left decorative body 3354, the back right decorative body 3454, the back middle left side decorative body 3562, and the back middle right side decorative body 3572 can be visually recognized.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 is such that, in the backside movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000, the backside decorative body unit 3230 is positioned at a lowered position that is a downward moving end, and a pair of backside bottoms. The left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are located at a separation position where their tips are separated from each other. Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body unit 3350 is located at the retracted position that is the moving end to the left in front view, and in the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decorative body unit. 3450 is located at a retracted position that is a moving end to the right in front view. Further, in the back middle movable effect unit 3500, the back middle left decorative body unit 3510, the back middle right decorative body unit 3520, and the back middle central decorative body unit 3530 are located at the retracted position that is the upward moving end. At the same time, the pair of the back middle left side decorative body unit 3560 and the back middle right side decorative body unit 3570 are respectively located at the retracted positions which are the left and right pivot ends.

  In this normal state, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 of the lower back decorative body unit 3230 in the lower back movable effect unit 3200 is positioned behind the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the first start in front view is performed. On the upper side of the mouth 2002, it is visible from the front (player side) through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. In addition, the back left decorative body 3354 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is located behind the left side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the vicinity of the right side is forward (player side) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Visible from. Further, the back right decoration body 3454 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is located behind the right side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the vicinity of the left side is forward (player side) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Visible from.

  Further, in the normal state, the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 of the back center movable effect unit 3500 are the back front upper left decorative body 3112 of the back front decorative unit 3100. The back front upper right decorative body 3113, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and the back front logo decorative body 3115 are located behind and cannot be seen from the front (player side). Further, the back center left side decoration 3562 of the back center movable production unit 3500 is located behind the back front left side decoration 3116 of the front front decoration unit 3100, and a part thereof passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Visible from the front (player side). Furthermore, the back middle right side decorative body 3572 of the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is located behind the front right side decorative body 3117 of the front front decorative unit 3100, and a part thereof passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Visible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, the outer periphery of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 is the front front upper left decorative body 3112 and the front front upper right decorative body 3113 of the front front unit 3110. , And the front upper middle decorative body 3114, the back lower decorative frame 3232 decorating the outer periphery of the sub effect display device 3240, the back left decorative body 3354, and the back right decorative body 3454.

  In a normal state, the back bottom rotation drive motor 3234 of the back bottom movable effect unit 3200 is driven to rotate the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and at the same time, the back bottom right decorative body unit. When the 3260 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the tips of the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are in contact with each other in front of the sub effect display device 3240 (or possible). As a result, the approach position is reached (see FIG. 148).

  In a state where the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 (back lower left decorative body 3253) and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 (back lower right decorative body 3263) are rotated to the approach position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 The back lower right decorative body 3263 forms a heart shaped decorative body. Further, in a state where the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 are rotated to the approach position, the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253, and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the back lower right decorative body 3263, A small V-shaped decoration is formed. Furthermore, the back bottom left decorative body 3253 and the back bottom right decorative body 3263 are in a state of covering the left and right portions of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240, and the back bottom left decorative body 3253 and the back bottom right decorative body are covered. From the front (player side) through the transparent panel board 1110 and the center accessory 2500 (stage 2530) on the upper side of the first start port 2002, only the center portion of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 from between It will be in a visible state.

  Accordingly, since the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 can be combined (approached) to form one heart-shaped decoration behind the stage 2530, the player's interest is It can be attracted to 2530, the first start port 2002, or the like. In addition, the back bottom left decorative body 3253 and the back bottom right decorative body 3263 can hide part of the sub effect display device 3240 (the left part and the right part). It can be attracted to the lower decorative body unit 3230 and the like.

  Further, in a normal state, when the pair of lower back raising / lowering drive motors 3212 of the lower back movable rendering unit 3200 are driven, the back lower decorative body unit 3230 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position as an upward movement end. Most of the display screens of the sub-effect display device 3240 are positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 149). As a result, since the lower back decorative body unit 3230 is located on the lower front surface of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is the lower back decoration. Since it is blocked by the body unit 3230, the backside decorative body unit 3230 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest can be directed to the backside decorative body unit 3230.

  Moreover, since the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 can be satisfactorily viewed through the frame of the center accessory 2500 by setting the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 to the raised position, The effect image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 3240 can be viewed in a good state, and the effect image by the sub effect display device 3240 can be more enjoyed.

  The back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are driven by the back bottom rotation drive motor 3234 with the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 of the back bottom movable effect unit 3200 moved to the raised position. Rotate from the separation position to the approach position (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 are combined into a heart shape within the frame of the center accessory 2500 near the center of the game area 5a. It can be thought that there is something, and it can raise the expectation for the game. Further, in the frame of the center accessory 2500, a small V-shaped decoration formed by the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the back lower right decorative body 3263 is given to the player. Since it can be shown, it can be suggested to the player that a chance has arrived.

  Further, in a normal state, the back left drive motor 3304 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right drive motor 3404 of the back right move effect unit 3400 are driven to return the back left decorative body unit 3350 (back left decorative body 3354). ) And the back right decorative body unit 3450 (back right decorative body 3454) are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a, respectively, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 As a result, the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are narrowed (see FIG. 151). As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is reduced, so that the player can be aware of the movement of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body are displayed. It is possible to entertain and enjoy the future movement of the body 3454.

  By driving the back left drive motor 3304 of the back left movable rendering unit 3300 and the back right drive motor 3404 of the back right movable rendering unit 3400, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are further moved from the first appearance position. When moved to the second appearance position moved to the center side of the game area 5a, the lower ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 approach each other in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. , Each is inclined obliquely (see FIG. 152). In this state, since the pair of back left decorative body 3354 and back right decorative body 3454 obliquely blocks the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are conspicuous. And the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454.

  In the state of FIG. 152, the left-side decoration extending diagonally between the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back left decorative body 3354, and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back right decorative body 3454 diagonally. The extended decoration on the right side is formed symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and is separated from the left and right, so that one decoration is incomplete. The player can be reminded that it will be a complete decoration, and a sense of expectation can be given to the subsequent effects.

  Further, in a state where the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved to the second appearance position, the lower ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are the back bottom decorative body in the back bottom decorative body unit 3230. It is located on the rear side of the upper side of the frame 3232, and the upper ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are the front front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 of the front front unit 3110. It is located so as to be continuous with the lower end of each. Thus, the player can see the continuous decoration extending diagonally by the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back left decorative body 3354, and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back right decorative body 3454. Can attract the player's interest. Further, since the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 appear to extend radially upward from the sub effect display device 3240, the player's interest is expressed by the sub effect display device 3240 (back bottom decorative body unit 3230). ), And a sense of expectation can be enhanced with respect to the performance performed by the back lower decorative unit 3230.

  With the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 moved to the second appearance position, the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are driven by driving the back bottom rotation drive motor 3234. When rotated from the separation position to the approach position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back left decorative body 3354 are obliquely aligned in a straight line to form an integrated decoration, and the back lower right decorative body 3263 and the back The right decorative body 3454 and the right decorative body 3454 are aligned in a straight line to form an integrated decoration (see FIG. 153). Thereby, the player can be shown a large V-shaped decoration over the entire height in the game area 5a, with the bottom end of the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 as the lower end. A strong impact can be given to the player, and a sense of expectation for occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player can be increased.

  When forming this large V-shaped decoration, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 may be repeatedly reciprocated between the separation position and the approach position. When the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 move to the approach position, a V-shaped decoration is formed continuously with the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454, respectively. The back bottom left decorative body 3253 and the back bottom right decorative body 3263 are stopped at the approaching position, and the player can be thrilled by whether or not a large V-shaped decoration is formed. The movement of the lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 can be enjoyed.

  By the way, after moving the back lower decorative body unit 3230 to the raised position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 are moved to the approach position, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved. Is moved to the third appearance position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back left decorative body 3354 are arranged obliquely and continuously, and the back lower right decorative body 3263 and the back right decorative body 3454 are arranged. It becomes the state which arranged in a row diagonally (refer to Drawing 154). As a result, a V-shaped decoration is formed in a size that covers the entire height of the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can be informed of the chance and the expectation of the game is further enhanced. Can be made.

  As shown in FIGS. 148, 150, 153, and 154, three large, medium, and small V-shaped decorations can be formed, so that the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 can be formed. The V-shaped decoration formed by showing the player the V-shaped decoration of the size corresponding to the result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls of Depending on the size of the game, the probability of the occurrence of “big hit game”, the expectation level of big hit, and the value of “big hit” (for example, “number of rounds such as“ 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds ”,“ probability hits ”,“ short time ” , Etc.) can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the game can be used properly so as to correspond to various effects.

  Further, in a normal state, the pair of back center left drive motor 3541 and back center right drive motor 3551 of the back center movable effect unit 3500 are driven to rotate the left lifting arm 3546 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. At the same time, when the right lifting arm 3556 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 are moved downward from the retracted position. As a result, at the retracted position, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body 3114 are positioned behind the back and cannot be viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 155, the middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle central decorative body 3531 are a front front upper left decorative body 3112, a back front upper right decorative body 3113, and a front front upper middle. Since it can be visually recognized by appearing below the decorative body 3114, the appearance of the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 attracts the player's attention. be able to.

  Then, when the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 are moved to the lowest appearance position, the lower end of the circular back center central decorative body 3531 displays the main effect display. The back center left decorative body 3511 and the back center right decorative body 3521 are in contact with each other above the back center central decorative body 3531 (see FIG. 156). Thereby, in the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the movement of the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 can be enjoyed, and the back center left decorative body The player can be surprised to see one large decoration formed by an inverted triangle as a whole by the body 3511, the back center right decoration body 3521, and the back center central decoration body 3531.

  With the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 moved to the appearance position, the back center central decorative body 3531 is rotated with a back center control motor (not shown). After that, the rotation of the back center decorative body 3531 is stopped so that the sub decorative portion 3531a of the back center decorative body 3531 matches the decoration of the back center left decorative body 3511 (see FIG. 157). Thus, the player can show the player a large predetermined logo decoration formed by the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531. It can be thought that there is something good, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  The back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, and the back center central decorative body 3531 are moved to the appearance position, and the back center central decorative body 3531 is rotated to rotate the sub decorative portion 3531a and the back center left decorative body 3511. In the state of matching with the decoration, the back center left side decoration unit 3560 is rotated counterclockwise by driving the back center side drive motor 3581 and the back center right side decoration unit 3570 is rotated. Are rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view to move each to the appearance position, the lower ends of the back middle left side decorative body 3562 and the back middle right side decorative body 3572 are in the back middle central decorative body 3531. The back middle left side decorative body 3562 and the back middle right side decorative body 3572 are outward from the left and right sides of the circular back center central decorative body 3531. A state as extended (see Figure 158). Accordingly, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed by the back center left decorative body 3511, the back center right decorative body 3521, the back center central decorative body 3531, the back center left side decorative body 3562, and the back middle right side decorative body 3572. It is possible to form a huge decoration that covers almost the whole of the game, so that the player can be greatly surprised, and the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player is advantageous Expectation can be raised.

  As described above, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, since various movable effects can be performed, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored, and to make the player fully entertained and to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Lighting effect on game board]
Next, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 165. In FIGS. 159 to 165, for the sake of convenience, the light and darkness during light emission are shown reversed. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first light guide plate of the front middle unit is decorated with light emission, and FIG. 160 is a game board shown in the state where the second light guide plate of the front middle unit is decorated with light emission. FIG. FIG. 161 shows the back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit as the lowered position and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit as the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is decorated with light emission in a small V shape using the back lower right decorative body. FIG. 162 shows the back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit as the raised position and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit as the approaching position. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board in a state in which the back lower right decorative body is light-decorated in a heart shape with the same color.

  FIG. 163 shows the back bottom decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit as the raised position and the back bottom left decorative body unit and the back bottom right decorative body unit as the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is decorated with light emission in a small V shape using the back lower right decorative body. FIG. 164 shows the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the approaching position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable rendering unit in the lowered position, and the back left movable rendering unit and the back right movable The back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the production unit are set as the second appearance positions, and the back front upper left decorative body and the back front upper right decorative body of the back front decoration unit, the sub production display device, and the back lower left decorative body. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board shown in a state where a large V-shaped light is decorated using a back lower right decorative body, a back left decorative body, and a back right decorative body. FIG. 165 shows that the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position with the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable rendering unit in the raised position, and the back left movable rendering unit and the back right movable The back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the production unit are set as the third appearance position, and the sub production display device, the back lower left decorative body, the back lower right decorative body, the back left decorative body, and the back right decorative body are used. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made the medium-shaped V-shaped light emission decoration.

  As shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body in the back front decorative unit 3100. 3114, back front left side decorative body 3116, back front right side decorative body 3117, back front left lower decorative body 3118, back front right lower decorative body 3119, back front lower middle decorative body 3168, back front and rear left decorative body 3169, and back The transparent first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 of the front middle unit 3130 closing the inside of the frame formed by the front and rear right decorative bodies 3170 are in a state in which (almost) it cannot be seen from the player side. ing.

  When the front board middle unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 emits the first LED 3141a of the front front middle left decoration board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the front front middle right decoration board 3143, the game board 5 emits the first light. The first pattern 3135a of the light guide plate 3135 is light-decorated, and the first pattern 3135a is displayed in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 above the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240. (See FIG. 159). Thereby, since the first pattern 3135a is displayed in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, it is possible to surprise the player and entertain the player. The first picture 3135a can urge the player to participate in the player participation type effect with a predetermined character string, and can entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 159, in the state where the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light emission, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 is not blocked by the first pattern 3135a. On the other hand, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240 can be viewed in a good state, and the effect image by the sub effect display device 3240 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the first picture 3135a is decorated with light emission, it is desirable to display information on the game, player participation type effect, etc. on the sub effect display device 3240, which can make the player more entertaining. When the first light guide plate 3135 (first pattern 3135a) is decorated with light emission, the LED on the decorative substrate behind the first light guide plate 3135 is turned off or dimmed, or the display of the main effect display device 1600 is performed. It is desirable to make the screen darker or blacker.

  Further, in the back front middle unit 3130 of the back front decorative unit 3100, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, back When the LED 3144a of the front middle lower right decorative board 3144 is caused to emit light, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is light-decorated, and the second pattern is displayed in front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3240. 3136a is displayed (see FIG. 160). Thereby, the radial second pattern 3136a centered on the center of the game area 5a is displayed in a wider range than the first pattern 3135a in front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3240. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised.

  In addition, when the second effect 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is decorated with light emission while displaying a predetermined effect image on the main effect display device 1600, the effect image having different front and rear positions and the second image 3136a overlap. Can give a sense of perspective, and can make the player more entertaining with a display effect with a three-dimensional effect. In addition, during the movable effect as described above, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 may be decorated with light emission, and the collaboration between the second pattern 3136a and the movable effect attracts the player more strongly. Can make the player more entertaining.

  Further, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 of the back lower movable effect unit 3200 are rotated to the approach position with respect to the normal state, and then the front lower left decorative board 3171 and the back The front right lower decorative board 3172 provides a middle decorative portion 3168a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, and the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 provides a middle decorative portion 3253a and back lower right of the back lower left decorative board 3253. The medium decoration portion 3263a of the decorative body 3263 is illuminated and decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white), and the sub-effect display device 3240 has the same color as the medium decoration portion 3253a and the medium decoration portion 3263a and is continuous with them. When the image (V-complementary decoration image) is displayed, a small V-shaped light-emitting decoration is played on the rear side of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500. It can be shown to the user (see Figure 161). This makes it possible for the player to think that the V-shaped luminescent decoration represents “Victory” (win), so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game” )) Can be expected to increase.

  The back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative body 3253 middle decorative portion 3253a, the back lower right decorative body 3263 middle decorative portion 3263a, and the sub effect display device 3240 are small. When performing the V-shaped light emitting decoration, the peripheral decorative part 3168b of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the peripheral decorative part 3253b of the back lower left decorative body 3253, and the peripheral decorative part of the back lower right decorative body 3263 3263b may be illuminated in red. Thereby, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which a flame is emitted from around the V-shaped band of light, and the player can be more focused.

  Further, the back lower decoration unit 3230 of the back lower movable effect unit 3200 is moved to the raised position, and the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the lower lower right decoration unit 3260 are moved to the approach position with respect to the normal state. The back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 are used to illuminate the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 in red, and the sub effect display device 3240 has a red color. When the effect image (heart complement decoration image) is displayed, a heart-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player in the lower part of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 162). Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, you may make it show a heart-shaped light emission decoration when the back lower surface decoration body unit 3230 is a lowered position. At this time, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 in the back front / rear unit 3160 of the back front decorative unit 3100 is illuminated with red light by the back front left lower decorative board 3171 and the back front right lower decorative board 3172.

  Furthermore, after moving the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 of the back bottom movable effect production unit 3200 to the raised position with respect to the normal state, the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are moved closer to each other. The back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 cause the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the lower lower right decorative body 3263 to have a predetermined color (for example, White), and the sub-effect display device 3240 displays an effect image (V-complementary decoration image) that is continuous with the same color as the medium decoration portion 3253a and the medium decoration portion 3263a. In the lower part of the frame, a small V-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player (see FIG. 163). As a result, a small V-shaped light emitting decoration can be seen near the center of the game area 5a, and therefore, compared to the example of FIG. You can entertain more.

  When performing middle-sized V-shaped light emitting decoration with the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253, the middle decorative portion 3263a of the lower lower right decorative body 3263, and the sub effect display device 3240, the lower back The peripheral decorative portion 3253b of the left decorative body 3253 and the peripheral decorative portion 3263b of the back lower right decorative body 3263 may be illuminated with red light. This makes it possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which a flame is emitted from around the V-shaped band of light, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the light-emitting effect can be more enjoyable. I can do it.

  Further, with respect to the normal state, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are rotated to the approach position, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved to the second appearance position. In the state of being moved, the back front upper decorative board 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 and the front front upper left decorative body 3112 middle decorative portion 3112a and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 middle decorative portion 3113a, and the front front lower left decorative The middle decorative portion 3168a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 by the substrate 3171 and the back right lower decorative substrate 3172, and the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 by the back lower left decorative substrate 3254 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3264. And the back left decorative body 3354 by the middle decorative portion 3263a and the back left decorative board 3355 and the back right decorative board 3455. 3354a and the middle decoration part 3454a of the back right decoration body 3454 are illuminated and decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white), and the sub effect display device 3240 is continuous with the same color as the middle decoration part 3253a and the middle decoration part 3263a. When such an effect image (V-complementary decoration image) is displayed, a large V-shaped light-emitting decoration over almost the entire height in the game area 5a can be shown to the player (see FIG. 164).

  Accordingly, the player can be shown a large V-shaped light-emitting decoration that is larger than the center accessory 2500 and covers almost the entire height of the game area 5a, so that the player has an advantage over the player. It can be convinced that a gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) will occur, and the player's expectation can be greatly increased.

  Inside the back upper left decorative body 3112, the middle decorative portion 3112a, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, the middle decorative portion 3113a, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the middle decorative portion 3168a, and the back lower left decorative body 3253 In the decoration part 3253a, the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, the middle decoration part 3354a of the back left decoration body 3354, the middle decoration part 3454a of the back right decoration body 3454, and the sub effect display device 3240 When performing a large V-shaped light emitting decoration, the peripheral decorative part 3112b of the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the peripheral decorative part 3113b of the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 Peripheral decorative part 3168b, peripheral decorative part 3253b of back lower left decorative body 3253, peripheral decorative part 3263b of back lower right decorative body 3263, peripheral decorative part 3354b of back left decorative body 3354, and back right A peripheral decorative portion 3454b of Kazaritai 3454 may be red light is emitted decorated. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which a flame comes out from around the large V-shaped band of light, so that a strong impact can be given to the player and expectations for the game can be achieved. The feeling can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, after moving the back bottom decorative body unit 3230 of the back bottom movable effect production unit 3200 to the raised position with respect to the normal state, the back bottom left decorative body unit 3250 and the back bottom right decorative body unit 3260 are moved closer to each other. And the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved to the third appearance position, and the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 The middle decorative portion 3253a and the back lower right decorative body 3263 middle decorative portion 3263a, and the back left decorative substrate 3355 and the back right decorative substrate 3455 make the back left decorative body 3354 the middle decorative portion 3354a and the back right decorative body 3454 middle decorative portions. 3454a with a predetermined color (for example, white) and a sub-effect display device 3240 with a medium decoration part 3253a and a medium decoration part 3263. When the effect image (V-complementary decoration image) that is continuous with the same color is displayed, the medium-shaped V-shaped light-emitting decoration can be shown to the player within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (FIG. 165). See). As a result, in the center of the game area 5a, a medium-sized V-shaped light emitting decoration over the entire height of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be seen, so that an advantageous gaming state compared to the examples of FIGS. 161 and 163 It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for occurrence of the game and to make the player more entertaining.

  A middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253, a middle decorative portion 3263a of the back lower right decorative body 3263, a middle decorative portion 3354a of the back left decorative body 3354, a middle decorative portion 3454a of the back right decorative body 3454, When the medium effect V-shaped light emitting decoration is performed with the sub effect display device 3240, the peripheral decorative portion 3253b of the back lower left decorative body 3253, the peripheral decorative portion 3263b of the back lower right decorative body 3263, and the back left The peripheral decorative portion 3354b of the decorative body 3354 and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b of the back right decorative body 3454 may be illuminated and illuminated in red. As a result, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which a flame appears from around the medium-shaped V-shaped band of light. It is possible to attract a lot of interest and entertain the lighting effect.

  The light-emitting effects as described above are only a part, and various light-emitting effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the LEDs of the decorative boards. In addition, an infinite number of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the above-described movable effects, light emission effects, effect images by the main effect display device 1600, and effect images by the sub effect display device 3240. In addition to making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame side effect display device 460, and a main effect based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3240. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball due to the rotation operation of the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3167 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3166 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a gaming ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a large detecting ball that is received in the big winning opening 2005. Detection signals from a prize opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs control signals from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. From the main control I / O port, the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display 1402, the first special symbol display 1403, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405, the first A drive signal is output to the two special hold number indicators 1406, the round indicator 1407, the normal hold indicator 1408, and the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3167, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3166 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3167, the second start port sensor 2402, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3167, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game ball of the big prize opening sensor 2403 is changed. Detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3166 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3166 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
A payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682 and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 255. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU 952a which is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 952a is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU 952a incorporates functions and the like to prevent fraud.

  The payout control unit 952 of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input control port via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit and is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 839). “3” is displayed If there is a “counting switch error”, the fact that the payout detection sensor 842 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 is notified, and the number “5” is displayed. If the number “6” is displayed, a “retry error” notification is made (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 270 is full) and the number “7” is displayed. If it is, “CR not connected” is notified (that the electrical connection is cut off from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number “9” is displayed. (Specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) message indicating "stock" when there are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU 952a. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining level on the ball rental return display unit 330. Is input and displayed in the ball rental return display unit 330.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 is omitted in detail, but the firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding the firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 255 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 302, and a single button that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the ball. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 250 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs presentation control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame side effect based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. The display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3240, and the like are provided.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3032 or the gaming board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the motor drive board 3033, or the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration motor 424 provided in the frame 3, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like, and door side driving light emission data configured from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration driving board. Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be transmitted to the frame 3 side or displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 In addition to transmitting to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the motor drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Yes. The detection signal from the press detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and performs various effects from the upper speaker 573, the speaker 921, etc. provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal as sound information is sent to the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU 1511a includes the built-in WDT and the external WDT. In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. k) BPS (seconds per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a to the effect driving board 3032 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board 3032 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  Further, the motor drive board 3033 outputs a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, or the like.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but as a microprocessor. Display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a door frame side effect display device 460, a main effect display device 1600, and a sub effect display device 3240 for display control VDP (Video Display) (Processor abbreviation), door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, sub effect display device 3240, and various data stored in the image ROM. An image RAM that is transferred and copied That.

  This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame side effect display device The drawing control of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3240 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands from the peripheral control unit 1511) in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. ) And non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and the like. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 is determined. It is prescribed. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. This non-resident area transfer data is obtained by transferring screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order of transferring various data is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, Drawing data to be displayed on the sub effect display device 3240 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. In addition, when the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP sends an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Output. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 is held in the line buffer. Is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. . Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition order”) is set, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect. Drawing is performed on display device 1600 and sub-effect display device 3240.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by scanning and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing one direction. The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 receive the door frame side effect display as main scanning when the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input. When viewed from the front of the device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right for one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly drawing data for the next line is displayed. When input, based on the drawing data for the next line, as the main scan, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 are sequentially viewed from the left to the right, Each pixel is output to one line of pixels.

[7. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails K (see FIG. 120) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball is obstructed. By contacting the nail K, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail K, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The region on the left side of the accessory 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530. .

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and is released forward from either the central guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532 to return into the game area 5a. Is done. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2530, the central guide portion 2531 is positioned immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2002, it is detected by the first start port sensor 3167. Then, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port sensor 3167. Is done.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guide portions 2532 provided on the left and right sides of the central guide portion 2531, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the like of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the game ball is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is received. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening sensor 3166 detects the game ball. Based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning opening sensor 3166, the payout device via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls from 830 is paid out to the upper plate 321.

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 with high probability.

  When the game ball that has been hit right passes through the gate unit 2003, the gate sensor 2401 detects the passage of the game ball, and based on the detection, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. In the case of “winning”, the second start opening door 2411 closing the second start opening 2004 protrudes forward by driving the start opening solenoid 2412 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds) and is in an open state. Thus, the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal variation time is shorter, the game balls for which “normal hit” has been drawn in the gate portion 2003 can be received in the second start port 2004 arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003.

  If a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “4R big hit”, “6R big hit”, “ There are "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", "perpendicular change (probability change)", "shorter time (shorter time)", "shorter per probability change", "no short per probable change", and so on.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special prize opening door 2413 that closes the special prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game balls can be received into the special prize opening 2005. It becomes a state. When a game ball is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state, the big prize opening sensor 2403 detects the game ball. Then, based on the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are transferred from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout board. It is paid out to the plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to receive game balls, a lot of gaming balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the winning prize opening 2005 When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating four rounds for “4R big hit”, six rounds for “6R big hit”, and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3240, and the like, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image that is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 or the like is obtained by varying each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed side by side. The displayed symbol sequences are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol sequences are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol sequences to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 or the like, and the lottery An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 etc. The time until the image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600 or the like, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 is displayed according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decorative unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back bottom movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, and back middle movable effect unit 3500 , Etc. can be used as appropriate to produce a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in games is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first processed as a process of step S1 on condition that an operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize data stored in various registers and RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. In the variation display of the decorative symbols executed by the main effect display device 1600 in response to the variation display of the special symbols, the variation random numbers used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of Reach (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the same design, middle decorative design is not displayed yet, and left, middle and right decorative designs are all synchronized to change to the same design. Reach random number used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to display, symbol used for lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number A random number counter that holds random numbers such as numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), random numbers (normal random numbers) that are used in lottery processing for winning when the second start door 2411 is operated, etc. It has.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the first big prize port sensor 4005, the second big prize port sensor 2402, the first Detection signals from various switches such as the reception port sensor 2434, the second reception port sensor 2435, and the general prize port sensor 3111 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door 2411 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start port door 2411 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery is selected. When the result is successful, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second start door 2411.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then outputs information such as hit information (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. I do.

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the first big prize port sensor 4005, and the second large size. When detection signals such as the prize opening sensor 2402 and the general prize opening sensor 3111 are on, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 168, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3112. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit A”, The first grand prize winning port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the game balls received in the second big prize winning port 2006 are the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432. The active state is in the first round in which the game balls can be distributed to the second receiving port 2432 among the first to third rounds in which the distribution pieces 2433 to be distributed to any of the above are controlled by driving and the second winning opening 2006 is opened. Execute the process set to. In addition, when the mode suggests “15R big hit B”, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close in accordance with the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the second big winning opening 2006 is displayed. The second receiving portion of the first to third rounds that controls the drive of the sorting piece 2433 that distributes the received game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 and opens the second big winning opening 2006. A process of setting the valid state in the first round in which game balls can be distributed to the entrance 2432 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a “valid state” is provided as a state when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432. Here, in the “valid state”, in the first round in which the game balls can be distributed to the second receiving port 2432 among the first to third rounds in which the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened, It is a state in which it is allowed (validated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is completed by accepting the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the “valid state”, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit game state is finished. Further, in the present embodiment, the “invalid state” different from the “valid state” is provided as a state in which the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432. Here, in the “invalid state”, among the first to third rounds in which the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened, the second and third rounds in which the game balls are distributed to the first receiving entrance 2431 and the first major prize opening 2005 are opened. In the fourth to fifteenth rounds and the like, in principle, no game balls are received in the second receiving port 2432, and even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, there is a high probability after the jackpot gaming state ends. This is a state where control to the state is not allowed (invalidated). Therefore, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the “invalid state”, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit game state is ended. In addition, the “invalid state” is to enable the hall management side to be notified of information regarding the occurrence of an abnormality when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 due to an abnormality such as an illegal act. In addition, a period in which whether or not a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 is monitored. In this embodiment, the game ball is set to the “valid state” in a predetermined round (first round) in which the game balls can be distributed to the second receiving port 2432, and the game balls are placed in the second receiving port 2432. When the game is accepted, the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the “invalid state” is set for a predetermined round (2nd to 15th rounds) in which game balls are not distributed to the second receiving port 2432, but may be set to “valid state”. As described above, even if the “valid state” is set in all rounds in the big hit gaming state, the game balls are not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in the second to fifteenth rounds. As in the case where the “invalid state” is set in the round, it is important whether or not the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the first round set in the “valid state”.

  In the big hit control process (step S41), after the opening control of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is executed. . The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During execution of the big hit game state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game balls to the second receiving port 2432 among the first to third rounds that open the second big winning opening 2006 When a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the high probability flag is set because the high probability state (high probability short-time state) is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the high probability state (high probability short-time state) is not controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. Therefore, the high probability flag is not set. When the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 178, which will be described later, The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is in effect, and is used for big hits (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which are controlled to a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when exiting based jackpot gaming state. The hour / short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 178 described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or the counter value of the hour / hour counter reaches “0”. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues. The short-time state (high probability) When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) to control to the short time state, low probability short time state), the number of times of the short state is set, and the short time counter is Each time the special symbol variation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, the countdown is performed. However, when the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. Is reset (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3112 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a is used as the processing in step S44. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold number is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). The first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. A lottery regarding the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which processing is performed (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 167).

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a jackpot determination table at a low probability shown in FIG. 174 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 174 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table at a low probability and a jackpot determination table at a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (high probability short state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, it is coincident with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number is won, and the 299 types of first special random numbers are determined to be out of place. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to in order to match the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, 299 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that (a jackpot probability at a low probability: 1/300).

  Moreover, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 10 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability coincide with the jackpot determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 290 types of first special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value (high probability of big hit: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time short state)) and short time state (low) It is increased to 10 times the probability short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. 10 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, like the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating winning and match with the loss determination values indicating that the 290 kinds of second special random numbers are out of place (when the probability is high) Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that it is out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). As a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 175, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 174 (B). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be the off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 174 (B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in association with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the big hit gaming state A, and the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round. Opening difficult to enter (for example, 0.5 seconds) and opening for a long time (opening that allows a game ball to enter (easily), for example, 20 seconds). If the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the game is accepted in the second round of the effective state in the first round. After the big hit game state is over, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability short-time state until the variable display is executed 100 times, while the second symbol is received during the effective state in the first round. A game ball at the entrance 2432 Only if not put in, 15R jackpot controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 100 times A
2. Opening and closing control of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round (the game ball is Opening difficult to enter (for example, 0.5 seconds) in an effective state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) When the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are displayed after the big hit gaming state. If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the effective state in the first round while the game is executed 100 times, a special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state. ( Determining in any of the jackpot from the 15R jackpot B, 2 types of jackpot which variation display one special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, out of 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, 15R big hit A (one round is relatively advantageous to the player). There is a high probability that a game ball will be received in the second receiving port 2432 during the effective state of the eye, and 50 judgment values will be distributed to the big hit with a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state. Although it is set, 15R big hit B, which is relatively unfavorable to the player (the probability that a game ball will be accepted by the second receiving port 2432 during the effective state in the first round is low, and high after the big hit gaming state ends) 50 determination values are assigned to the jackpot with a low probability of controlling to a probability state. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big hit A and the 15R big hit B, the judgment value distribution is set only for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B, which has a different degree of player's advantage, is determined. Can be noticed. In addition, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of big hit on the side, since it is always decided to be 15R big hit game A, it is possible to pay attention only to how much prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of consecutive resort. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive time, the game does not become monotonous.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 15R big hit B is determined, the 15R big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when 15R jackpot A is determined, 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, the reach out of the reach, or the off (the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the left / middle / right decoration symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays the left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → middle decoration symbol in this order. Thus, the display control of the main effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of change stoppage of the decorative symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600, out of the jackpot related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command When 15R big hit A is specified, it is determined as 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when 15R big hit B is specified, it is decided as 15R big hit B symbol (common with 15R big hit A symbol), When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped at either the 15R big hit A symbol or the 15R big hit B symbol, it is determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R big hit A symbol and the 15R big hit B symbol, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B cannot be determined.

  Further, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the reach deviation from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600 is stopped, the failure is accompanied by reach. If the design is determined to be a combination of decorative designs that are not the same (but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and a detachment is specified, it is a detachable design (a combination of decorative designs that is not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the reach flag is set (step S143), a reach variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, it will be a normal off-line (a non-reach effect is not executed) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S148). As a result, effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 1403 and the main effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 178, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As a process of the above, the display control for causing the first special symbol display 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the main special effect display device 1600 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the decorative symbol display result corresponding to the symbol stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S183). If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S184), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined in the process of step S183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S187), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S188), and the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). The waiting time (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is further set. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S191), this process is terminated.

  Note that the jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the jackpot type (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S39).

  In step S189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. In the process of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 and opens the second big prize opening 2006 in the first to third rounds. Of these, the big winning opening opening / closing process set to the valid state in the first round (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) (step S402). And the second grand prize opening 200 in the first round among the first to third rounds that open the second big prize opening 2006. The distribution ball 2433 is driven and controlled so that the game balls accepted in the second round can be distributed to the second reception port 2432, and the game balls are received in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round. The second reception opening / closing process (step S403) for monitoring whether or not it has been performed is executed in order.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a performs a predetermined time (for example, from the open state of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, which will be described later. When 20 seconds have been opened for a long time, 0.5 seconds have been opened for a short time) (step S412), or the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 in an open state. When the game ball has won the maximum number of wins (for example, 9) (step S413), the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize won in an open state. 2006 is controlled in a closed state (step S414). When it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state (step S415), it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A jackpot round end command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set as a command (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

  If it is determined in step S411 that the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in a closed state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a has a timing for opening the first big prize port 2005 or the second big prize port 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first big prize port 2005 and the second big prize port 2006, which will be described later. (Step S417), when it is determined to start a new round by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S418), the peripheral control board The jackpot round start frame corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds as a command sent to 1510 To set the de (step S419). Then, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 described later, that is, among the first to third rounds that open the second big prize opening 2006 If it is the start time of the first round (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). When the valid state flag is set, if it is determined in step S420 that it is not the time to set the valid state flag, that is, if it is the start time of the second round, the valid state flag is reset. There is a need to. Then, the closed first closed winning opening 2005 or the second closed winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. When it is determined that a new round will not be started (such as the second opening within the same round) by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 to the open state. (Step S418), or when it is determined that it is not the time to set the valid state flag (when it is not at the start of the first round) (Step S420), the first big prize opening 2005 in the closed state or The second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. Thereby, the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect corresponding to the type of the big hit and the current number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command.

  The effective state flag indicates a state set to an effective state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). Flag. In the first round among the first to third rounds where the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened, the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006 in the second acceptance opening / closing process (step S403) described later are the first. The distribution pieces 2433 that are distributed to either the receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 are driven and controlled so that the game balls can be received in the second receiving port 2432 and are set to an effective state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S428 that a game ball has been received at the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 is shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a sets a prize winning ball entering command as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S429), and ends this processing. As a result, when a prize winning ball entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball at the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is a main effect. It can be executed by the display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  If it is determined in step S417 that it is not time to open the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the main control is performed as shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 finishes all rounds by repeating the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S423), the big hit is being executed. The flag is reset (step S424). If it is determined that a second receiving port passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S425), a high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of the short time state (step S427), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the second reception pass flag is not set (step S425), the high-probability flag is not set, the time-short flag is set, and the time-saving state is set to the counter value of the time-count counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times to continue (step S427), this process is terminated. As described above, when it is determined that the second reception pass flag is set (a game ball has been received by the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round), a high probability flag and Set the short time flag and control to the high probability short time state, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball was not accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round) If it is determined, only the time reduction flag is set, and the low probability time reduction state is controlled.

  FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in an open state (a state in which game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432 by the sorting piece 2433), FIG. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, which will be described later, from the open state of the second receiving port 2432 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 when open for a long time). Seconds, 0.2 seconds when opening for a short time) (step S423), or by controlling the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state, the current round (the first round) is ended. Sometimes (step S433), the second receiving port 2432 in the opened state is closed (to the first receiving port 2431 side by the sorting piece 2433). Controlling the state) technique sphere is distributed (step S434).

  If it is determined in step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the vibration described later. In accordance with the operation schedule of the segment 2433, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2432 (step S435), the closed second receiving port 2432 is controlled to open (step S436).

  Next, if it is determined in step S437 that the game ball has been received in the opened second receiving port 2432, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 In the set effective state flag, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the effective state in the first round (step S438). If it is determined that a game ball has been received by the second receiving port 2432 during the effective state in the first round (step S438), the second receiving port is input during the effective state in the first round. When the second acceptance passage passing flag indicating that the game ball has been received is not set in 2432 (step S439), the second acceptance passage passing flag is set (step S440) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the second reception pass command is set as a command (step S411), this process is terminated. As described above, unless a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the second receiving port passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Since it is not set, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the second reception pass command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the main production display device 1600, lamp / LED, speaker, etc. Can be executed.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the game (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per symbol”, the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 167).

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821 It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in the storage areas of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S826), the short time normal figure hit judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S825). In step S827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state), A non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used when the gaming state is non-time / short-time (low probability non-time / short-time state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate portion 2003 in the time reduction, the player always wins by the usual figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to reach the second start opening 2004. The game ball is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that the common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the second start opening door 2411 is rotated and the second start door 2411 is rotated because there is no win per the usual figure. There is no control that allows the game ball to be received at the start port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the symbol is normal (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is It is much easier to win a game ball to the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. You can win a prize. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. In addition, a game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during control in the non-time-saving state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win a game ball. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center bonus 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and flow down. For this reason, even if a game ball is shot on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002, but wins the first start opening 2002. The game balls that have not existed are discharged to the outside through an out port 1126 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, it is possible to win a game ball more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than at the first start port 2002. In order to win, the game ball must be launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, it passes through the gate portion 2003. The game balls thus won are awarded to the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control in the time-saving state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1126 or the sub-out port 2007). Compared to the first start port 2002 during the state control, the game ball wins the second start port 2004 very efficiently.

  In addition, during the control of the short time state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Due to the fact that the time required for control is constant and short and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, it is easy for a game ball to win the second start port 2004, and further the game to the second start port 2004. When the ball is won, the time required for the display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. It is possible to digest the symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control). That is, when the short hit state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second start port 2004 is one, and therefore, the number of game balls to the second start port 2004 is Even if winnings occur frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 185, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the main effect display device 1600 is executed based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set is received.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4017 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[10. Modification 1]
In the above-described example, as shown in FIG. 165, these decorative bodies are illuminated and decorated with the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 being moved in front of the main effect display device 1600, and further the center accessory 2500. The back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative body 3253, and the back lower right decorative body 3263, which are provided on the outer periphery of the outer periphery, are illuminated and decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white). By displaying on the sub effect display device 3240 an effect image (V-complementary decoration image) that is the same color as the middle decoration part 3253a and the middle decoration part 3263a and is continuous therewith, a large-sized display over almost the entire height in the game area 5a. Although the V-shaped light emitting decoration is configured to be shown to the player, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a specific variation pattern command, the main effect display device 160 is displayed. The light guide plate (first guide) provided in front of the main effect display device 1600 instead of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 without moving the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 in front of The light plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136) are decorated with a predetermined pattern so as to realize a light emitting decoration integrated with a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. Also good.

  When a predetermined timing (a specific timing based on scheduler data, for example, a timing for executing the reach effect or a predetermined timing in the reach effect) arrives while the main effect display device 1600 is performing the variable display of decorative symbols, Light emission control is simultaneously performed with the same color on one or both of the light plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and a decorative body provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and a predetermined portion of the door frame 3. Based on the “specific emission effect pattern”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs light emission control by controlling the light emission of one or both of the light guide plate, a decorative body provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500, a predetermined portion of the door frame 3, and the like. The effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 187 to 191. In FIGS. 187 to 191, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol (in this example, “7”) and reach the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and the center. A light emission effect is performed with a decorative body or the like provided on the outer periphery of the accessory 2500. Further, in the light emitting decorations of the first and second modifications, the “V-shaped” light emitting decoration is shown in the same manner as the above-described embodiment. (Including the device))) is not limited to this, and the mode of the light-emitting decoration is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of modes (light-emitting colors and decorations for light-emitting decoration when a specific variation pattern command is received) Etc. (including the display device)) in the form determined by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a decorative body provided on the outer periphery of the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and the center accessory 2500 (display device) May be integrated with a light emitting decoration.

  In addition, when the light emitting decoration is performed in any of a plurality of types, a big hit expectation may be different depending on the aspect of the light emitting decoration. For example, when the “V-shaped” light emission decoration is made with a red light emission color, the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, only when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command with a big hit, the red light emission color “ The V-shaped “light-decoration” is determined), and when the “V-shaped” light-decoration is performed with the blue light-emitting color, the expectation of the big hit is the lowest (for example, the fluctuation that causes the peripheral control MPU 1511a to be off Only when the pattern command is received, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the mode and executes the lighting decoration in the determined mode so that the “V-shaped” lighting decoration is performed with the blue emission color). Alternatively, the expectation level of jackpot may be different depending on the emission color, and the expectation level of jackpot is highest when the “V-shaped” lighting decoration is applied (for example, peripheral control MPU 1511a). When a variation pattern command that is a big hit is received, it is determined to be a “V-shaped” light emitting decoration at a rate of 80/100, and when a variation pattern command that is out of place is received, a rate of 5/100 In the case of “V-shaped” lighting decoration, the biggest hit expectation is the lowest when the “one horizontal letter” lighting decoration is applied (for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command that is a big hit. In this case, it is determined that the lighting decoration of “one horizontal character” is set at a ratio of 5/100. The peripheral control MPU 1511a may determine the mode and execute the light-emitting decoration in the mode determined (to determine the pattern (shape) of the light-emitting decoration). The expectation level for jackpots is different), and the expectation for jackpot is the highest when the “V-shaped” light emitting decoration is bold, and the biggest hit is expected when the “V-shaped” lighting decoration is thin. The peripheral control MPU 1511a may execute the light emission decoration in a mode determined by determining the mode so that the degree is low (differential expectation degree is different depending on the line width), or a combination thereof (for example, red The biggest hit expectation is the highest when the bold “V-shaped” light-emitting decoration is used in the light emission color, and the most big hit expectation is when the light emission decoration of the thin “one horizontal character” is used in the blue light-emitting color. The peripheral control MPU 1511a may determine the mode so as to be lower, and execute the light emission decoration in the determined mode.

  A single light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 3135) may be used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width), or a plurality of light guide plates (for example, the first light guide plate 3135 and the first light guide plate 3135). Two light guide plates 3136) may be used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shapes and line widths). When a single light guide plate is used to represent multiple types of patterns (shape and line width), depending on the direction of light incident on the light guide plate (for example, light incidence from above and light incidence from the lateral direction) These designs are drawn so that different designs (shape and line width) appear. In addition, when a plurality of types of patterns (shapes and line widths) are represented using a plurality of light guide plates, they are drawn so that different patterns (shapes and line widths) appear for each light guide plate. When a plurality of types of patterns (shapes and line widths) are expressed using a single light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 3135), the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses an LED (for example, a light guide plate). LED that emits light from the upper side of the light guide plate provided near the upper side and LED that enters the right side of the light guide plate and enters the light from the right side of the light guide plate (LED corresponding to the mode of light emission decoration) If the light guide plate is decorated with light emission in a desired manner, and a plurality of light guide plates (for example, the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136) are used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shapes and line widths). The peripheral control MPU 1511a corresponds to the light guide plate on which the picture according to the mode of the light emitting decoration is depicted (for example, the first LED 3141a and the first LED 3143a that are incident on the first light guide plate 3135, and the second light guide plate). The second LED 3141b, the LED 3142a, the second LED 3143b, and the LED 3144a that make light incident, and the LED corresponding to the light guide plate on which a pattern according to the mode of light emission decoration is depicted) are caused to emit light, and the light guide plate is made in a desired manner. Decorate with luminous. When a single light guide plate is used to represent a plurality of patterns, space can be saved in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, when a plurality of light guide plates are used to represent a plurality of patterns, the LEDs need only be arranged on one side, which can save space in the vertical and horizontal directions and reduce the number of LEDs installed. Cost can be reduced.

  FIG. 187 illuminates and decorates the first light guide plate of Modification 1 and moves the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit to the approach position when the back lower decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit is in the lowered position. Using the back front upper left decorative body and the back front upper right decorative body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, and the back lower right decorative body, a large V-shaped light is decorated. FIG. 188 is a front view showing the decoration of the first light guide plate of the first modification. FIG. 189 shows the first light guide plate of the modified example 1 with light emission decoration, and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit approached when the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position. And a large V-shaped decoration using the back front upper left decorative body and the back front upper right decorative body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, and the back lower right decorative body. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the made state. FIG. 190 is a simplified cross-sectional view of the center accessory of the second modification as seen from the side by cutting at the approximate center in the left-right direction. FIG. 191 shows a state in which the light guide plate of Modification 2 is decorated with light emission, and the left intermediate decoration body, right intermediate decoration body, left unit decoration cover, and right unit cover are used for light emission decoration. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown by. In FIG. 187 to FIG. 191, for the sake of convenience, the light and darkness at the time of light emission is reversed, the light emission decoration of the decorative body is shown by cross hatching, and the light emission decoration of the light guide plate is shown by single hatching.

  As shown in FIG. 187, the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative board 3143 are caused to emit light with a predetermined emission color, and the first light guide plate 3135 is displayed with a predetermined pattern. In the case of lighting decoration (when light emission is controlled based on a specific lighting effect pattern), the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are rotated to the approach position and the back front decorative unit 3100 The back front upper decorative substrate 3120 and the back front upper left decorative body 3112 middle decorative portion 3112a and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 middle decorative portion 3113a, the back front left lower decorative substrate 3171 and the back front right lower decorative substrate 3172 The back lower left decorative body 32 is constituted by the middle decorative portion 3168a of the front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative board 3254, and the back lower right decorative board 3264. 3 is decorated with a light emitting decoration (V complementary light emitting decoration) in the same color (for example, red) as the pattern for light emitting decoration on the first light guide plate 3135, and the middle decorative part 3263a of the back lower right decorative body 3263. Furthermore, the sub-effect display device 3240 displays an effect image (V-complementary decoration image) that is continuous with the same color as the pattern that emits light on the first light guide plate 3135, so that the light emission decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is achieved. The game area 5a is extended so as to cover almost the entire height so that a large V-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player.

  This allows the player to show the player a large V-shaped light emitting decoration that is larger than the center accessory 2500 and extends over the entire height of the gaming area 5a. The player can be convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) that the player is advantageous will occur, and the player's expectation can be greatly increased. Further, in the case where these light-emitting effects are executed when the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the main effect display device 1600 become reach, a large V-shaped character that is extended so as to extend over almost the entire height in the game area 5a. The light-emitting decoration is suddenly performed, and the light-emitting decoration is performed at a position closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600 (position closer to the player than the main liquid crystal display device 1600). Therefore, the player can be surprised and surprised, and a decrease in the interest in gaming can be suppressed.

  Further, there is little difference in the front-rear direction with a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided behind the game panel 1100 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500, which is disposed closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600. Since the light guide plate (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135) is used, the light guide plate (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135) and a decorative body provided behind the gaming panel 1100 outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (display device) Can be decorated with a light emitting decoration in a state close to a flat state, and thereby the light emitting decoration on the light guide plate (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135) and the rear of the gaming panel 1100 outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 Since the continuity with the light emitting decoration such as a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the display increases, a more integrated light emitting decoration can be realized. In addition, as long as it can be recognized as an integral light-emitting decoration, each or a part may be light-decorated with a different color without making them all with the same color.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a ends the light emission control after executing the light emission control of the first light guide plate 3135 and the like based on the specific light emission effect pattern continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). The main effect display device 1600 is darkened while the light emission control of the first light guide plate 3135 or the like based on the specific light emission effect pattern is being executed, or the brightness of the backlight (white LED) is lowered than normal. The light emitting decoration (picture) of the light guide plate 3135 may be conspicuous, and in addition to this, a decorative body or the like whose light emission is controlled based on the specific light emission effect pattern (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135, the middle The brightness of the LED or the like for stopping the light emitting decoration such as a decorative body other than the decoration part 3112a, the medium decoration part 3113a, the medium decoration part 3168a, the medium decoration part 3253a, the medium decoration part 3263a, and the sub effect display device 3240). The light emission decoration executed based on the specific light emission effect pattern may be made conspicuous by lowering.

  As shown in FIG. 188, only a part of the V-shaped pattern is depicted on the first light guide plate 3135 of Modification 1 by a plurality of minute irregularities, and only the pattern that illuminates and decorates the first light guide plate 3135. Then, it is difficult to specify what kind of pattern is represented. When the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative board 3143 emit light with a predetermined light emission color, the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The front front upper left decorative body 3112 and the front front upper decorative substrate 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 are supplemented by the back front upper decorative substrate 3120 so as to compensate for the incomplete pattern decorating the first light guide plate 3135. The middle decorative portion 3113a, the back front left lower decorative substrate 3171, the back front lower right decorative substrate 3172, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative substrate 3254, and the back lower right The first light guide plate 3135 is formed by attaching the middle decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the lower back right decorative body 3263 by the decorative substrate 3264. Light-decorated with the same color (for example, red) as the light-decorated pattern (for example, V-complementary light-emitting decoration) By displaying a continuous effect image (V-complementary decoration image), the entire V-shaped picture is displayed and the player can easily recognize.

  When the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light emission, a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided in the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the game panel 1100)). )) Is not illuminated, the incomplete pattern in which the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light is supplemented by a decorative body or the like (V-complementary decorative body) outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The player may be recognized by representing the whole. For example, the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 are arranged so that the first light guide plate 3135 is continuous with the light emitting decoration pattern, and the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front The first light guide plate 3135 may be decorated with a light emission color that can be seen integrally with the upper right decorative body 3113.

  In addition, the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification is configured such that only a part of a predetermined pattern (V-shaped pattern) is depicted, but this is a case where all of the predetermined pattern is depicted. However, the present invention is applicable. For example, although all of the predetermined pattern is depicted on the first light guide plate 3135, a part of the pattern is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to a decorative body arranged in front of the first light guide plate 3135. When the incomplete pattern is visible to the player, other decorations are placed in a predetermined manner so as to compensate for the portion that is difficult to see when the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light emission. The whole of the predetermined picture may be expressed by decorating the first light guide plate 3135 with the same color as the picture that decorates the light. When it is easy for the player to recognize specific information (for example, information that is a big hit when the “V” design is drawn) from the design that is visible to the user, Aspect (first light guide plate 3135 It may be representative of a predetermined pattern over a wider range than the region occupied by the first light guide plate 3135 by causing emission decorated with pictures same color as) for light decoration.

  Further, in this example, when the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light emission, in addition to a decoration body provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, a decoration body provided on the door frame 3 (display device) Including), it is designed to realize an integrated luminous decoration. In this example, the concave and convex portions of the square pyramid that are arranged in front of the decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 and project forward are respectively supported. A plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are provided, and the unevenness of the square frustum on the front surface of the decorative lens portion 579a can be individually decorated with light emission.

  As shown in FIG. 189, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a decorates the first light guide plate 3135 with light emission, the decorative lens portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 is continuous with the pattern that emits light decoration on the first light guide plate 3135. The first light guide plate 3135 is illuminated and decorated with the unevenness of the square frustum in the corresponding region (the region surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 189) in the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580. By illuminating with the same color as the pattern (V-complementary luminescent decoration), the luminescent decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is extended to extend substantially over the upper end of the door frame 3, and a large V-shaped luminescent decoration is played. It can be shown to the person.

  Thereby, the player is shown a large V-shaped light-emitting decoration that is expanded so that the light-emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is larger than the center accessory 2500 and the game area 5a and extends to substantially the upper end of the door frame 3. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and greatly increase the player's expectation. Can do. In addition, the light guide plate (in this example, the first guide) is arranged in a position closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600 and has a small difference in the front-rear direction from a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3. Since the light plate 3135) is used, the light guide plate (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135) and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emission in a nearly flat state. As a result, the continuity between the light-emitting decoration of the light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate (in this example, the first light-guide plate 3135) and the decorative decoration (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 increases. A luminous decoration can be realized.

  Further, in this example, when the first light guide plate 3135 is decorated with light emission, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is connected to the door frame side effect display device 460 with the same color as the pattern that light-decorates the first light guide plate 3135. An effect image (V-complementary decoration image) is displayed. As a result, the light-emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is expanded so as to exceed the upper and lower ends of the game area 5a (ie, protrude upward and downward from the game area 5a), and the player can show a large V-shaped light-emitting decoration to the player. This makes it possible to show the player a large V-shaped light-emitting decoration that is extended so that the light-emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 extends beyond the upper and lower widths of the game area 5a. On the other hand, it is possible to more strongly make sure that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous, and to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Note that if the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is extended so as to extend over a range larger than the center accessory 2500, the inside of the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in this example, the rear of the game panel 1100). ) Or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative body or the like provided on the door frame 3 (including the display device) may be decorated with light emission. However, the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided in the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 emit light. By decorating, the pattern light-emitting decorated on the first light guide plate 3135 and the light-emitting decoration such as a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3 are in the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to show the player a large light-emitting decoration that is connected by a light-emitting decoration such as a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the first light guide plate 3135 and has a pattern of light-emitting decoration on the first light guide plate 3135. In other words, both the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided in the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 emit light. By decorating the pattern, the first light guide plate 3135 is light-decorated, a decorative body outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500, etc. (a decorative body provided in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the gaming panel 1100)) Continuity between the light emitting decorations including the display device) and the decorative body or the like provided on the door frame 3 (including the display device) can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, when the light emitting decoration is performed in any of a plurality of modes, the decorative body (inside the game area 5a (in this example, the game panel 1100) of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 according to the mode of the light emitting decoration. Between the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the rear side) and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 may be different from each other. Of the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3, the decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 are the first of a plurality of types of light emitting decorations of the light guide plate. The left unit decoration cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 are decorated according to the second aspect among the plurality of kinds of light emission decorations of the light guide plate. It may be.

  In the above example, the decorative body provided in the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in this example, the back of the game panel 1100) is illuminated. When a predetermined picture is drawn behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the picture drawn on the first light guide plate 3135, the first light guide plate 3135 is illuminated with light. Incident light may be used so that the game panel 1100 itself functions as a light guide plate. As a result, the game area 5a outside the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 is illuminated and decorated with the same color as the pattern that is used to decorate the first light guide plate 3135, and the light emission decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is the game area 5a. The player can show the player a light-emitting decoration with a large pattern that extends to the end.

[11. Modification 2]
In the second modified example, the same light emitting decoration as in the first modified example is executed, but the decorative body provided in the game area 5a on the outer peripheral outer side (in this example, behind the gaming panel 1100) is referred to as the first modified example. They are arranged at different positions.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, in Modification 2, all the openings of the center accessory 2500 are closed so as to block the opening in front of the center accessory 2500 (so as not to prevent the rolling of the game ball on the stage 2530). A light guide plate 1610 may be provided (which may have an opening in a part thereof without being blocked). That is, the light guide plates (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) of Modification 1 are provided behind the gaming panel 1100 as shown in FIG. 126, whereas the light guide plate 1610 of Modification 2 is provided. It is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (player side) and close to the glass unit 190. Therefore, in the light guide plate 1610 of the second modification, the difference in the front-rear direction from a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3 is reduced compared to the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135) of the first modification. Since the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 can be light-decorated at a position closer to the flat than the first modification, the light guide plate 1610 is light-decorated with a predetermined pattern. In this case, the continuity between the light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 1610 and the light-emitting decoration of a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3 is increased, and a more integrated light-emitting decoration can be realized. .

  Further, in this example, the center portion is arranged so as to be close to the decorative body (including the display device) provided at the position continuous with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate among the decorative bodies (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3. When the object 2500 is formed and the center accessory 2500 is illuminated in a position near the glass unit 190 in front of the game panel 1100 (player side), the light emission decoration of the center accessory 2500 and the door frame 3 are displayed. The continuity with a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided on the display is improved.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, the center accessory 2500 according to the second modification includes a tunnel-like left guide passage 2550 for discharging game balls flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a left guide. And a plurality of ridges 2551 protruding into the passage 2550. The left guide passage 2550 forms a passage (flow path) having a width that allows only one game ball to flow between the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. The plurality of protrusions 2551 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game balls when the game balls flowing in the left guide passage 2550 come into contact with each other. Further, as in the other embodiments, the center accessory 2500 according to the second modification is a tunnel-shaped right guide that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view to the left and then releases it downward. A passage 2540 and a plurality of protrusions 2541 projecting into the right guide passage 2540 are provided. However, a sheet-like left sheet LED substrate 1611 formed of a PET resin that is transparent or translucent enough to visually recognize the back portion is attached to the surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side, A sheet-like right sheet LED substrate 1612 formed of a PET resin that is transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) is visible to the player side surface of the right guide passage 2540. Further, the LED mounted on the left sheet LED substrate 1611 formed of PET resin is connected to a wiring pattern printed on the left sheet LED substrate 1611, and the wiring pattern is connected via a connector (not shown). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is connected. Similarly, the LED mounted on the right sheet LED substrate 1612 formed of PET resin is connected to a wiring pattern printed on the left sheet LED substrate 1611, and the wiring pattern is connected via a connector (not shown). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is connected.

  Note that the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 are formed of transparent (translucent) resin (acrylic resin or the like) that is transparent or visible to the back. Further, the left sheet LED substrate 1611 and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the respective surfaces are also formed of transparent (translucent) PET resin that is transparent or visible to the back. Further, the LEDs mounted on the left sheet LED substrate 1611 and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 are smaller than the game balls, and the wiring pattern printed on each sheet LED substrate is thinner than the diameter of the game balls. As described above, the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the left sheet LED substrate 1611, and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 are formed of a transparent or translucent (translucent) resin that allows the back to be visually recognized. In order to mount an LED smaller than the game ball on the LED board 1611 and the right sheet LED board 1612, the game ball is passed through the tunnel-like left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 at the back of the left sheet LED board 1611 and the right sheet LED board 1612. Even if it flows down, the visibility of the game ball flowing down does not decrease (does not hinder viewing). As a result, it is possible to execute a large light-emitting decoration that is extended over a wide area in front of the game area 5a. , Can reduce the decline of the game entertainment.

  When the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with a predetermined pattern, the LED mounted on the left sheet LED board 1611 attached to the player side surface of the left guide passage 2550 and the player side of the right guide passage 2540 The LED mounted on the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the surface is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner (emission color, light emitting area, etc.) so as to be continuous with the pattern decorated on the light guide plate 1610 and left guided By light-decorating the passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540, the pattern light-decorated on the light guide plate 1610 is extended to the outside of the light guide plate 1610.

  The player-side surface of the left guide passage 2550 and the player-side surface of the right guide passage 2540 are formed so as to be close to the glass unit 190, and are in a state (substantially flush) with the light guide plate 1610. ing. Therefore, the left sheet LED substrate 1611 attached to the player side surface of the left guide passage 2550 and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the player side surface of the right guide passage 2540, the light guide plate 1610, and the door A difference in the front-rear direction from a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided in the frame 3 is reduced, and the decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided in the light guide plate 1610 and the door frame 3 overlaps with the game area 5a. Since the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 that are provided can be decorated with light emission at positions closer to the flat than in the first modification, the light guide plate 1610 emits light when the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission with a predetermined pattern. The continuity between the decorated pattern and the light emitting decoration of the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decoration of the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 increases. It is possible to realize an integral light-emitting decoration.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, when the light guide LED 1620 is caused to emit light and the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light with a single horizontal pattern, the left guide path corresponds to the light emission region and the light emission color of the light guide plate 1610. The LED mounted on the left sheet LED substrate 1611 attached to the surface of the player side of 2550 and the LED mounted on the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the surface of the player side of the right guide passage 2540 The left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 are illuminated with light of the same color as the light guide LED 1620, and the light guide plate 1610 is illuminated with the same width as that of the horizontal character that decorates the light guide plate 1610. In addition, the right unit cover 563 is decorated with the same color as that of the light guide LED 1620 so that the width of the right unit cover 563 is substantially the same as that of the horizontal character used to decorate the light guide plate 1610.

  Thereby, each light emission decoration can be performed at a position closer to a flat, and the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 1610 is extended so as to cover substantially the whole area in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, thereby playing a large-sized horizontal one-character light emission decoration. It can be shown to the person. Further, by performing the light emission decoration near the flat position, the continuity (integral feeling) of the light emission decoration is increased, and an impression that the pattern for light emission decoration of the light guide plate 1610 is expanded more realistically can be given.

[12. Modification 3]
Next, another example of the decoration effect using the light guide plate will be described as a third modification. In the third modified example, as in the light guide plate 1610 in the second modified example, the opening in front of the center accessory 2500 is blocked (all the openings in the center accessory 2500 are not disturbed so as not to prevent the rolling of the game ball on the stage 2530). (It may have an opening in a part thereof without closing)) One light guide plate is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (player side), and light is incident from one side of this one light guide plate. The light guide plate is illuminated with a predetermined pattern, but one or more LEDs among a plurality of LEDs provided corresponding to one side are caused to emit light in a predetermined order, and light on the same side of the light guide plate. By making the incident position different, it is possible to switch the design for illuminating the light guide plate to a different design.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192, four LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LED 1622a to 1622d, LED 1623a to 1623d, LED 1624a to 1624d, LED 1625a to 1625d, LED 1626a to 1626d, LED 1627a are provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610, respectively. To 1627d) are provided with a plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. Then, the LED (LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) located at the leftmost in the drawing among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 is caused to emit light and enter the light guide plate 1610. By doing so, the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission with the maximum size pentagonal pattern (first continuous pattern).

  In addition, among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, one right side (from the left side) of the LED (a group; LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) located on the leftmost side in the drawing. LED of the second position (b group; LED 1621b, LED 1622b, LED 1623b, LED 1624b, LED 1625b, LED 1626b, LED 1627b) is made to emit light and enter the light guide plate 1610 to make the pentagonal pattern slightly smaller than the maximum size pentagon. The light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission by (second continuous pattern). Similarly, the right side (from the left) of the LEDs (LED 1621b, LED 1622b, LED 1623b, LED 1624b, LED 1625b, LED 1626b, LED 1627b) located second from the left in the drawing among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. The LED located in the third position (group c; LED 1621c, LED 1622c, LED 1623c, LED 1624c, LED 1625c, LED 1626c, LED 1627c) emits light and enters the light guide plate 1620 to make it smaller pentagonal pattern (third continuous pattern) The light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission, and the LEDs (d group; LED 1621d, LED 1622d, L) located on the rightmost side among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, respectively. D1623d, LED1624d, LED1625d, LED1626d, the light guide plate 1610 is emitted decorated with minimum size of pentagonal pattern by light incident on the light guide plate 1620 by emitting LED1627d) (fourth continuous pattern).

  As described above, in the third modification, among the four LEDs mounted on each of the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610, the rightmost LED from the group a located at the leftmost side in the drawing. By switching the LED group that emits light one by one up to the LEDs in the d group that are positioned, the pattern that illuminates the light guide plate 1610 changes continuously from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern. Yes. Moreover, a group of LED (LED1621a-1621d, LED1622a-1622d, LED1623a-1623d, LED1624a-1624d, LED1625a-1625d, LED1626a-1626d, LED1626a-1626d, LED1627a-1627d) mounted in the several light guide LED board 1621-1627 The light guide plate 1610 is illuminated with a first continuous pattern, a second continuous pattern, a third continuous pattern, and a fourth continuous pattern corresponding to the group, c group, and d group. When the light is incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 1610, light leakage due to the light diffusion effect of the LED occurs. That is, a condensing member or the like is not provided between the LED (LED 1621a to 1621d, LED 1622a to 1622d, LED 1623a to 1623d, LED 1624a to 1624d, LED 1625a to 1625d, LED 1626a to 1626d, LED 1627a to 1627d) and the side surface of the light guide plate 1610. (LEDs 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, and LEDs 1627a to 1627d) It is already exposed to the light guide plate 1610.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), when a group of LEDs (LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) is caused to emit light, a light incident part facing the group a LEDs Although the amount of incident light to the (a group facing part) is the largest and the first continuous pattern is relatively clearly expressed as the light enters the a group facing part, the light emission of the LED of the a group is on the side of the light guide plate Part of the light is also incident on the portion facing the b group (the amount of incident light is less than that of the portion facing the a group), and the second continuous pattern is even more exposed as the light enters the portion facing the b group. That is, when the a group of LEDs emits light, in addition to the clear expression of the first continuous picture, the light expression of the second continuous picture can occur simultaneously. Similarly, when the LED of group b emits light, in addition to the clear expression of the second continuous pattern, a slight expression of the third continuous pattern and the first continuous pattern can occur simultaneously, and the group c In addition to the clear expression of the third continuous pattern, a slight display of the fourth continuous pattern and the second continuous pattern can occur at the same time. In addition to the clear expression of the fourth continuous pattern, a light expression of the third continuous pattern can occur simultaneously. Accordingly, a group of LEDs (LEDs 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, and LEDs 1627a to 1627d) mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, With the sequential switching of the b group, c group, and d group, a change from the first continuous picture to the fourth continuous picture occurs continuously, and a light guide animation in which the picture continuously changes on the light guide plate 1610 is expressed smoothly. It becomes possible to do.

  Although not shown, the light guide plate 1610 of Modification 3 is also provided with a plurality of LEDs on the right side, and light is incident from the right side of the light guide plate 1610 by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light. A pattern different from the pattern or the fourth continuous pattern is displayed. For example, similarly to the light guide plate 1610 of the second modified example, the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 and the left unit are decorated with light emission decoration with a “horizontal character” pattern or the like and correspond to the light emission region and light emission color of the light guide plate 1610. The decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 may be decorated with light emission at a position nearer flat so that the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 1610 can be expanded realistically.

  Note that a light guide plate 1610 may be provided behind the game panel 1100 (in place of the first light guide plate 3135) in the same manner as the first light guide plate 3135 of Modification 1, and in this case, provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610. A, b groups of LEDs (LEDs 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d) mounted on a plurality of light guiding LED substrates 1621 to 1627 , C, and d are sequentially switched from the first continuous picture to the fourth continuous picture in accordance with the sequential switching of the light guide plate 1610, and the first provided on the right side of the light guide plate 1610. LED 3141a and first LED 3143a emit light to guide light By making light incident from the right side of 1610, the light-emitting decoration is made with the “V-shaped” pattern as in the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification, and the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610 is supplemented. A decorative body or the like on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the game panel 1100)) or a decorative body or the like provided on the door frame 3 ( (Including a display device) may be decorated with light emission.

  Moreover, in the modification 3, in relation to the effect display (reach effect etc.) performed with the main effect display apparatus 1600, the light emission decoration of the light-guide plate 1610, the decoration body provided in the door frame 3, etc. (a display apparatus is included). It is possible to execute an animation effect in which the light-emitting decorations are continuously switched by interlocking with the light-emitting decorations and the light-emitting decorations such as decorations provided in the game area 5a. The animation effect of this example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 193 to 197. Note that FIGS. 193 to 197 show the pachinko machine 1 including the center accessory 2500 in which the left guide passage 2550 of Modification 2 is formed, and a decorative body or the like provided in front of the game panel 1100 (player side) (display) Device) and decorations provided on the door frame 3 (including display devices) are shown in the light emitting decoration in relation to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 1610, but are provided in the game area 5a, the door frame 3, etc. If a decorative body other than the light guide plate 1610 (including a display device) is to be decorated in a light emitting manner in association with the light emitting decoration of the light guiding plate 1610, it is provided behind the gaming panel 1100 like the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification. A decorative body or the like (including a display device) or a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3 may be light-emitting decorated in association with the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610.

  In addition, aspects of the animation effect of the third modification (light emitting colors, decorative bodies (including display devices) and the like, including the display device, and the pattern of the light guide plate 1610 (first continuous pattern to fourth continuous pattern)) are shown in FIGS. The lighting decoration switching speed (for example, the mode of switching every 2 seconds and the mode of switching every 0.5 seconds) and the switching order (for example, from the first continuous pattern to the second continuous) are not limited to those shown in FIG. A mode in which the pattern, the third continuous pattern, and the fourth continuous pattern are switched in this order, and a mode in which the fourth continuous pattern is switched to the third continuous pattern, the second continuous pattern, and the first continuous pattern in this order). You may make it perform the animation production | presentation of the aspect which peripheral control MPU1511a determined from several types of different aspects, such as a step (step).

  Moreover, you may make it become a big hit expectation degree which changes according to the aspect of animation production. For example, when an animation effect in which the light guide plate 1610 or a decorative body is illuminated and decorated with a red light emission color is expected to have the highest jackpot expectation (for example, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command that is a big hit. Only light emission color of the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body is determined to be light-decorated), and the biggest hit is when an animation effect in which the light guide plate 1610 and the decoration body is light-decorated with the blue light emission color is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the expectation level becomes low (for example, only when the variation control command that causes the peripheral control MPU 1511a to be out of place is received, the light guide plate 1610, the decorative body, etc. are illuminated and decorated). The light emitting decoration may be executed in the mode determined by determining the mode (light guide plate 1610 or decorative body). When the animation effect is performed in which the lighting decoration is switched every 2 seconds (for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a big hit) When a pattern command is received, it is determined that the light emission decoration is switched every 2 seconds at a rate of 80/100, and when a variation pattern command that is out of sync is received, it is emitted at a rate of 5/100 every 2 seconds. When the animation effect is performed in which the lighting decoration is switched every 0.5 seconds, the expectation of jackpot is the lowest (for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command that is a jackpot) In such a case, it is determined that the light emitting decoration is switched every 0.5 seconds at a ratio of 5/100, and the fluctuation becomes a deviation. When the turn command is received, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the mode and executes the lighting decoration in the mode determined so that the lighting decoration is switched every 0.5 seconds at a rate of 60/100). Alternatively, the expected degree of jackpot may be changed according to the switching speed of the light emitting decoration. First, after the decorative body or the like is decorated with light emission, the light guide plate 1610 has the first continuous picture, the second continuous picture, and the third continuous picture. When an animation effect is performed in which the light emission decoration is switched so that the light emission decoration is switched in the order of the picture and the fourth continuous picture, the highest hit expectation is the highest, and the light guide plate 1610 has the fourth continuous picture, the third continuous picture, the second The biggest hit is expected when an animation effect is performed in which the lighting decoration is switched so that the decorative body etc. is illuminated and decorated after the luminous pattern is decorated in the order of the continuous pattern and the first continuous pattern The peripheral control MPU 1511a may execute the light emission decoration in a mode determined by determining the mode so that the degree is low (the expected degree of jackpot is changed according to the switching order of the light emission decoration), the decoration body, etc. After the light emitting decoration is applied, the light emitting decoration is divided into five steps (five steps) so that the light guide plate 1610 is light emitting decorated in the order of the first continuous picture, the second continuous picture, the third continuous picture, and the fourth continuous picture. When the animation effect to be switched is executed, the expectation of the big hit is the highest, and after the decorative body or the like is decorated with light emission, the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission in the order of the first continuous pattern and the second continuous pattern. The state in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines and determines the mode so that the expected degree of jackpot is the lowest when an animation effect that is switched over in three stages (three steps) is executed. The light emission decoration may be executed by (the expected degree of jackpot is varied according to the stage (step) of light emission decoration), or a combination thereof (for example, the light emission mode is 5 every 2 seconds in the red light emission color). When the animation effect that can be switched over the stage is executed, the highest expectation degree of the big hit is performed, and when the animation effect that the light emitting decoration is switched over every 3 seconds in the blue light emitting color is executed The peripheral control MPU 1511a may determine the mode and execute the light emission decoration in such a manner that the expectation degree of jackpot is the lowest.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the center accessory 2500 according to the third modification includes an upper center decorative body 2560 at the upper portion and a lower center decorative body 2570 at the lower portion. Further, a sheet-like center upper sheet LED substrate 1613 made of PET resin is attached to the player-side surface of the center upper decorative body 2560, and PET on the player-side surface of the center lower decorative body 2570. A sheet-like center lower sheet LED substrate 1614 formed of resin is attached. The center upper decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570 are formed so that the surface on the player side is close to the glass unit 190. Therefore, the difference in the front-rear direction between the center upper decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570, the decorative bodies and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3, and the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 is reduced. The center upper decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570, the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3, and the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 emit light at positions close to flat. Since it can be decorated, the sense of unity of the light emitting decoration can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this example, in addition to the center upper decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570, the decorative bodies and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3, the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 are guided. Since the light plate 1610 is also arranged in front of the game panel 1100 (player side) and all of them are arranged in a nearly flat state, the continuity of the light emission decoration is increased and the light emission decoration is smoothly switched, so that the animation effect is produced. The execution of the game can be improved by executing.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a first applies the LED mounted on the left sheet LED board 1611 attached to the player side surface of the left guide passage 2550 and the player side surface of the right guide passage 2540 when executing the animation effect. The LED mounted on the right sheet LED board 1612 to be attached and the game mounted on the center upper sheet LED board 1613 to be attached to the player-side surface of the center upper decoration body 2560 and the game below the center decoration body 2570 The LED mounted on the center lower sheet LED substrate 1614 attached to the surface on the person side is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner (emission color, light emitting area, etc.), and the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, and the center top The decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570 are light-emitting decorated with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red), and these light emission The predetermined ranges of the left unit decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 are the same as the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decorative body 2560, and the center lower decorative body 2570 so as to represent a predetermined form continuously with the decoration. Decorate with colors. In addition, as long as it can be recognized as an integral light-emitting decoration, each or a part may be light-decorated with a different color without making them all with the same color.

  Further, in this example, in the animation production, when the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decoration body 2560, the center lower decoration body 2570, the left unit decoration cover 536, and the right unit cover 563 are illuminated, the peripheral control is performed. The MPU 1511a continues to the door frame side effect display device 460 with the light emitting decorations of the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decoration body 2560, the center lower decoration body 2570, the left unit decoration cover 536, and the right unit cover 563. Various effect images are displayed. As a result, an integrated light emitting decoration is made over a wide range that exceeds the left and right end portions and the lower end portion of the game area 5a (and protrudes to the left and right of the game area 5a), and a large predetermined form (in this example) Pentagons), the player can be more convinced that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, “hit game”) will occur. It can be greatly increased.

  After performing the light emission decoration shown in FIG. 193, the peripheral control MPU 1511a ends the light emission decoration of FIG. 193 when a predetermined period elapses. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes LEDs (LEDs 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, and LEDs 1626a) mounted on the plurality of light guiding LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610. ˜1626d, LEDs 1627a to 1627d), a group of LEDs (LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) are made to emit light and the light guide plate 1610 is decorated with a first continuous pattern (FIG. 194). By switching the LED group to emit light every time the period elapses, the b group of LEDs (LED 1621b, LED 1622b, LED 162) b, LED 1624b, LED 1625b, LED 1626b, LED 1627b) corresponding to the light emission decoration of the second continuous pattern (FIG. 195), corresponding to the light emission of group c LEDs (LED1621c, LED1622c, LED1623c, LED1624c, LED1625c, LED1626c, LED1627c) The light emitting decoration of the third continuous pattern (FIG. 196), and the light emitting decoration of the fourth continuous pattern corresponding to the light emission of the d group of LEDs (LED 1621d, LED 1622d, LED 1623d, LED 1624d, LED 1625d, LED 1626d, LED 1627d) (FIG. 197), Do it sequentially.

  As described above, in Modification 3, the light guide plate 1610 provided on the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body provided on the outer side of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500 (the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, and the center). The upper decoration body 2560, the center lower decoration body 2570, the left unit decoration cover 536 and the right unit cover 563) and the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) are interlocked with each other to produce a light emission effect in which the light emission decoration changes continuously ( In order to execute (animation effect), it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel effect of continuously changing the light-emitting decoration over a wide range, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 193 to 197, an animation effect is executed such that the pentagonal light emitting decoration gradually decreases toward the central portion of the main effect display device 1600. Thereby, the player's eyes can be directed to the effect executed on the main effect display device 1600, and the effect executed on the main effect display device 1600 can be noticed, and the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first continuous picture to the fourth continuous picture have different line widths for each size. Specifically, the first continuous pattern representing the maximum size pentagon has the largest line width, and the line width gradually decreases as the size decreases (first continuous pattern> second Continuous pattern> 3rd continuous pattern). Thus, in addition to the change in the size of the pentagon, it is possible to give a sense of depth by changing the line width, and by changing the light emitting decoration from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern, the pentagonal pattern can be changed. It can give the impression that it gradually gets smaller and goes away in the depth direction.

  Although only one of the pentagonal patterns is clearly shown as a pattern for emitting and decorating the light guide plate 1610 of Modification 3, a plurality of pentagonal clear patterns may be displayed in multiples, Also in this case, the size and line width of each of the plurality of pentagons may be changed by changing the LED group to emit light.

  Further, when the animation effect is executed, the light emitting decoration may be switched in conjunction with the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. For example, the lighting decoration is switched every time the operation button 410 is pressed once or a predetermined time, or the duration of the lighting decoration is counted only while the operation button 410 is pressed, and the lighting decoration is changed when the predetermined period has passed. It is also possible to make the light emission decoration only while switching or pressing the operation button 410 and interrupting (disappearing) the light emission decoration when the pressing operation is interrupted.

  In addition, the animation effect shown in the third modification is an example, and the decorative body (the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 provided outside the inner periphery of the pattern and the center accessory 2500 displayed on the light guide plate 1610) The form represented by lighting decoration of the center upper decorative body 2560, the center lower decorative body 2570, the left unit decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563) and the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) has been described above. It is not limited to things. For example, decorative bodies (a left guide passage 2550, a right guide passage 2540, a center upper decorative body 2560, a center lower decorative body 2570, a left unit decorative cover 536, and a right unit cover 563 provided outside the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500. ) And the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) are illuminated and decorated to represent a predetermined form, and then the LEDs (LED 1621a) mounted on the light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on one side of the light guide plate 1610 Character patterns with different postures gradually change with the switching of the LED group to emit light among LEDs 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, and LEDs 1627a to 1627d) Movement or, may be executed animation effect sequential clear portion of the dialogue text picture with the switching of the light guide LED will change.

  In addition, LEDs (LEDs 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, and LEDs 1626a to 1627a to be mounted on the light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on one side of the light guide plate 1610. In 1627d), the contents of the effect may be branched in the middle of the animation effect by changing the pattern appearing on the light guide plate 1610 according to the switching pattern of the LED group to emit light. For example, an animation that represents a pattern in which a character reaches a goal when the LED gradually emits light by switching the LED group that emits light in the order of a group LED, b group LED, and c group LED. The character gradually moves by switching the effect pattern 1, the LED group a, the LED group b, and the LED group d in order, and the character reaches the goal when the LED group d emits light. Alternatively, an animation effect pattern 2 representing a pattern to be retired may be provided, and these may be selected and executed in association with the jackpot expectation. In this case, after the animation effect pattern 2 is executed a plurality of times, an animation pattern 3 for executing the animation effect pattern 1 may be provided, so that even if the animation effect pattern 2 is executed a plurality of times, the expectation for the big hit Can be prevented from losing the game, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, in the above-described modification 3, one light guide plate that changes the pattern to be displayed by changing the light incident position to the light guide plate by switching the LED group that emits light among the plurality of LEDs provided on one side. Although the animation effect is configured to be executed using 1610, the animation effect may be executed using a plurality of conventional light guide plates that do not change the picture to be displayed by changing the light incident position. For example, a first light guide plate that displays the first continuous pattern corresponding to light incidence, a second light guide plate that displays the second continuous pattern corresponding to light incidence, and a light incident The third light guide plate for displaying the third continuous pattern and the fourth light guide plate for displaying the fourth continuous pattern in response to light incidence in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the pachinko machine 1) An animation effect that continuously changes the pattern by switching the light guide plates to which light is incident (for example, the first light guide plate → the second light guide plate → the third light guide plate → the fourth light guide plate). You may make it perform. Further, in this case, a plurality of patterns may be displayed at the same time by making light incident on a plurality of light guide plates at the same time. For example, when switching the light guide plate that makes light incident from the first light guide plate to the second light guide plate In addition, the first continuous picture and the second continuous picture are provided by providing a period of time during which light is incident simultaneously on both the first light guide plate that is the light guide plate before switching and the second light guide plate that is the light guide plate after switching. Are displayed simultaneously for a predetermined period, and then the light incident on the first light guide plate is terminated, and the light is incident only on the second light guide plate to display only the second continuous pattern. This makes it possible to smoothly express a light guide animation with changing patterns. In addition, when light is incident on a plurality of light guide plates at the same time to display a plurality of patterns simultaneously, the brightness of the light incident LED may be changed. For example, the first light guide plate which is a light guide plate before switching The LED emits light at a lower brightness than the LED that makes light incident on the light, enters the second light guide plate that is the light guide plate after switching, and then gradually reduces the brightness of the LED that makes light incident on the first light guide plate. On the other hand, by increasing the brightness of the LED that makes light incident on the second light guide plate, the first continuous pattern gradually disappears, while the second continuous pattern gradually appears more clearly. You can express changes smoothly.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening part 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main effect display apparatus 2000 Table unit 2500 Center actor 3000 Back unit 3100 Front decorative unit 3110 Front front unit 3112 Front left upper decorative body (ornament)
3112c Decoration rear part 3112d Decoration front part 3113 Back front upper right decorative body (ornament)
3113c Decoration rear part 3113d Decoration front part 3120 Back front upper decoration board (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

In gaming machines that use gaming media to play games,
An effect display unit for performing a predetermined effect display;
A light guide decoration means that is provided in front of the effect display unit and that displays a predetermined light guide decoration on the front surface side by light incident on a predetermined light incident part;
Production control means for performing control related to the production including the production display and the light guide decoration,
The light guide decoration means is formed with a special light guide decoration pattern in which the light guide decoration exposed on the front side is continuously changed by the change of the light incident part,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect control means executes a dynamic light guide effect that continuously changes the light guide decoration by changing the light incident part while performing a specific display on the effect display unit. A gaming machine characterized by having means for performing.